IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) .^ V.J. 1.0 I.I 1.25 l^ilM 112.5 12.0 1.8 1.4 III 1.6 - 6" <^ ^. y VI >^^ r e^. .%'^ ■em ^'w ^>' ^ /A Photograrihic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. 14580 (716) 872-4503 >-'•:' .^ CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. D D D D D D Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur I I Covers damaged/ Couverture endommagie Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couveiture restaurde et/ou pelliculee I I Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque Coloured maps/ Cartes giographiques en couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) I j Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations an couleur Bound with other material/ Relii avec d'autras documents Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ Lareliure serrie peut causer de I'ombre ou d« la distorsion le long de la marge intdrieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties lor» d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte. mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont pas 6t6 film^es. Additional comments:/ Ccmmentaires suppldmentaires- L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui a M possible de se procurer. Les details de cat exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la mithode normale de filmage sont indiquAs ci-dessous. v/ Coloured pages/ Pages de couleur □ Pages damaged/ Pages endommagies □ Pages restored and/or laminated/ Pages restaurdes et/ou pelliculdes n/ Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ Pages ddcolories, tacheties ou piqu6es I I Pages detached/ Pages d6tach6es Showthrough/ Transparence Quality of prir Quality indgale de I'impression Includes supplementary materit Comprend du materiel suppl^mentaire Only edition available/ Seule Edition disponible r~7| Showthrough/ I I Quality of print varies/ I I Includes supplementary material/ pn Only edition available/ D Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc.. ont 6t6 film^es i nouveau de facon i obtenir la meilleure image possible. This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked be!ow/ Ce document est filmd au taux de reduction indiqud ci-dessous. Tl tc n p< 01 fi b( tf si 01 fi si 01 Tl si Tl w IVI di ei b< rii re m 10X 14X 18X 22X 26X 30X FT V 12X 16X 20X 24X 28X 32X The copy filmed h«re has been reproduced thanks to the generosity of: D. B. Weidon Library University of Westtern Ontario (Regional History Room) The imiges appearing here are the best quality possible considering the condition and legibility of the original copy and in iceeping with the filming contract specifications. L'exemplaire fMm4 fut reproduit grflce i la gin^rositA de: D. B. Weidon L ibrary Univnrsity of Western Ontario (Regional History Room) Les images suivantes ont 6t^ reproduites avec le plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et da la netteti de l'exemplaire filmi, et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. Original copies In printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the bBck cover whek~9 appropriate. All otiier original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or [l!ustrated impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. The laat recorded frame en each microfiche shall contain the symbol —^(meaning "CON- TINUED '). or the symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever applies. Lm exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en papier est imprimte sont filmte en commenpant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la darniire page qui comporte une empreinte d'Impression ou d'illustration. soit par le second plat, salon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires originaux sont filmte en commenpant par la premiere page qui comporte una empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la derniAre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la dernlAre image de cheque microfiche, seion 'e cas: le symbols -"^ signifie "A SUIVRE". le symbols y signifie "FIN". Maps, plates, charts, etc.. may bo filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one expoaure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre filmte d des taux de reduction diffirents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre reproduit en un seul cliche, il est filmA d partir de Tangle supArieur gauche, de gauche ^ droite. et de haut en baa. en prenant le nombre d'images nAcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la m^thode. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 m t^ Mi w^mm ^'AUTHORISED SERIES OF TTCXT BOOKS, Sanctioned by the Council of Public Instruction for use in the Qrammar Schools of Ontario. W. C. CHEWETT & CO. have issued special editions of the following on the List, which they offer to the trade and teachers on favourable terms : — LATIN. AN INTIlODUCTOItY LATIN BOOK. Jiv AtnEaT IIarkxe-ss, rij. D. 00 t'ts. A LATIN READIER, intended us a Companion to the Author's Lfttin Grnmmar. liy Albert IlARKNF.gs, Ph. D, 75 cts. LIBRI S J rH "4^ iLipflwl#l f i ,'^ !( . U, i- «---tr: / (> "€. iic 4^\,0<^''^ lr<^v/t^^'^^^^^^^^ SERIES" TEXT BOOKS, Of the following we have not; printed Special Editions, but keep in stock, and sell at lowest prices. t keep in stO( I W. C. CHEW-ETT & cO. /^ '^'^'''' * '. /^ • LATIN. ^rr-i:^/ic^f TICA? OR aTt mIp ^^'^9^^ ^^™ ^OOK AND PRAC- ^ ^l^Sf/f " ^^Pr ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY. ,. / iJy CHARtEs Anthox, LL.D. JH2.50. ^^V A Js 00 ^''^^'''^^^^ • % JosRP" Esmond RiddIjE, M.A. GBEEK. ^^y^^t^^^^>^^ LIDDI.E * SCOTT'S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON. $2.00. ANCIENT HISTORY, CLASSICAL GEO- ^ GRAPH Y AND ANTIQUITIES. A CLASSICAL DICTIONARY OF BIOGRAPHY MYTKn LOGY, AND GEOGRmiY. llfwZZ^'L^^lt^: A DICTIONARY OF GREEK AND ROMAN ANTIQUITIES By WitUAM Smith, LL.D. $4.50. ^ *'^^' A CLASSICAL DICTIONARY. By Chart.ks Anthox, LL.D. ^ ^^Lt!d:^^?.LS^^'^^'^^ ANTIQTJ.: TIES. By Char.ks Ant„ov, ■'" ^'jljyt\?L'^^™' ANTIQUITIES. By Cr,ARr.K« Antho., FRENCH. '"""I^ctl '''' ^•"^^^^f^'^« ^^'"- OF SWEDEN. By VomiuK, HORACE: a Tuaoedv. By Cornkille. 15 cts '^ ^ "^VSHIrTApi'^^^J 9^ ^^^ J^^ENCH AND ENG- A S ^''^^?S^^'^'^- % ^'^B'^Ki' SiTRExs.. Spiers' New Abridged Edition. $1.50. - piers i^ew ■'«-^. ■Ml 111 HI II nrt a • iniiniiiiiTiiiii" ^ ■■ ^^ li^3^ys The "ADTironrSED TEXT BOOk." Series. A SMALLER GRAMMAR or THE LATm LANGUAGE. By WILLIAM SMITH, LL.D., CLASSIOAt EXAMINER IN THE UNIVBft3ITY OF LONDON, AND EDITOR OP THE CLASSICAL AND LATIN DI0I0NARIE8. For the Usfi of tha Middle and Itowcr Fortns in Schools. NEW EDITION, TORONTO : W. 0. CHEWETT & CO. LONDON: JOHN MURRAY, ALBEMARLE STREET. 1867. a*p;" AUTHORIZED TEXT BOOK SERIES. — ■♦- — The. Counca of Public lastruction having issued a Revised List of Text Books, for use in the Grammar Schools of Upper Canada, the Subscribers havepubhshed Canadian editions of the following Booka on that list under the general title as above. """'• use, An Introductory Latin Book, by A. Ilarkncss P 4ft «n First Greek Book, by A. Ilarkness ;.* "''' ' ^' j l: Latin Reader, by A. Harkness G 1" Latin Grammar, by A. Harkness C 1 00 Smaller Grammar of the Latin Language, by W. Smith,' LL.D ' C 100 Smaller Grammar of the Greek Language.- ^q' j qq A Manual of Ancient History, by L. Schmitz '. '. C 1 26 First Steps in Classical Geography, by J. PiUans ............. C, o 37 ^ The following, which are on the Revised List, but of which we shall not issue^Canadian editions, we shall keep in stock, and supply at the prices Arnoia'8 first and Second Latin Book and Practical Grammar, by J. A. Spencer, D.D ' ^ *j 25 Latin-English and English-Latin Dictionary, by Charl'e'sAn- *^o°' ^^-^ A 226 The Young Scholar's Latin-English and English-Latin Die- tionary, by J. E Riddle, M.A A 3 00 LiddeU A Scott's Greek-English Lexicon. School editioL a' 2 20 Classical Dictionary of Biography, Mythology and Geography,' by W. Smith, LL.D __ A .^ SO Dictionary of Greefcand Roman Antiquiti'es,* by W.'smithrL^^^^ 4 50 Classical Dictionary, by Charles Anthon, LL.D A 4 60 " Manual of Roman Antiquities, by Charles Anthon,' Ll'd A ' 113 •• Greek " by Charles Anthon, LL.D.. .'.';.' A.* 1 I3 f . / X »: tl . / i CONTENTS. t PART I.—ACCIDENCE. CHAP. I. The Alphabet J II. Parts op Speech, Inflexion, Stem g III. The Substantive ^ TV. The First Declension ! ! ! * " R V. The Second Declension g VI. The Third Declension * * g VII. The Fourth Declension \\\ jg ^ VIII. The Fifth Declension i o IX. Irregular Substantives ' ' 20 X. Declension of Adjectives 01 XL Comparison op Adjectives * 04. Xll. The Numerals 07 XIII. The Pronouns j,^ . XIV. The Verb .*.'.*.'!.'.".'.'.'!!.*'.'.*!"" 85 XV. The Verb Sum and the Four Conjuoations .' .' .' .* .' .* .* .' 88 XVI. Deponent Verbs ^r, XVII. Periphrastic Conjugation [ gQ XVIII. Stems of Verbs, Formation op Tenses, and Pec^l^ar Forms .- XIX. Irregular Verbs a^ XX. Defective Verbs , ' " j-- XXI. Impersonal Verbs h.- XXII. Adverbs ' ^„ XXIII. Prepositions ,-« XXIV. Conjunctions ojv XXV. Interjections ^ «« XXVI. Appendix A— The Genders op Substantives ... 82 XXVII. Appendix B.— Perfects and Supines of Verbs 89 "^yII^J" ^^'^'^''"^^ «^ ^«««s. Derivation op Substantives 101 AAlA. Derivation op Adjectives in^ XXX. Derivation of Verbs j ^^ ' XXXI. Derivation op Adverbs •. ' /* 212 XXXII. Composition op Words * * j j o a 2 IV. CONTENTS. PART II.— SYNTAX. XXXIII. Or Sbntencks 1 15 XXXIV. Concord and Government 116 XXXV. The No'iinatitb Case 120 XXXVI. The ^accusative Case 121 XXXVII. The Genitive 128 XXXVIII The Dative ..^..^^...^.. lis XXXIX. The Ablative 140 XL. The Vocative I43 XLT. Adjectives I49 XLII. Pronouns I53 XLIII. The Verb : Indicitivb Mood 169 XLIV. The Imperitive Mood 1^3 XLV. The Subjunctive Mood 1^4 XLVI. The Infinitive Mood I80 XLVII. Participles , I84 XLVIII. The Gerund and Gerundive Participle 386 XLIX. The Supines 188 PART III.— PROSODY. L. Quantity ' iqq " Metre igg APPENDICES. I. The Ga(,endar 206 II. Money 209 III. Roman Names 210 rV. Abbreviations 211 V. Versus Mbmoriales 213 S( 6( ai 116 116 120 121 128 116 140 148 149 158 169 163 ld4 180 184 186 188 V' A SMALLER LATIN GRAMMAR. PART I. — ACCIDENCE. Chapter I.— The Alphabet. § 1. The Latin Language was the language of Latium^ of which Rome was the chief city. The conquests of the Romans caused it to spread over the rest of Italy, and over the greater part of France and Spain. The Latin Lan- guage IS no longer spoken, but the French, Italian, Spanish, and 1 ortuguese languages are mainly derived from it. § 2. The Latm Alphabet consists of 25 letters, being the same as the English without IF. A, B. C, p, E, F, G, H, I. J, K, L, M, N, O, P, a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, n, o, p, Q, R, S, T, U, V, X, Y, Z. q, r, s, t, u, V, X, y, z. Oba. 1. Originally i was used to express also the semivowel/, and v to de- note both the vowel sound u and the semivowel sound v. ^^'■J- i^'^ ^^^}^iy ^°^^ ^othelong to the old Latin Uphabet, and occurs only iji words borrowed fioin the Greek. ^ j' Pi^ ^^^^rs are divided into Vowels, which can be sounded by themselves; and Consonants, which cannot bo sounded without a Vowel. § 4. The Vowels are a, e, i, o, m, y. § 5. Consonants are divided into Mutes, Liquids, Sibilants, and bemivowels. ITie Mutes are divided according to the vocal organ wnic^ IS chiefly employed in pronouncing them. Shai'p or Thin. Labials (lip-letters) Gutturals 'throat-letters) Dentals (teeth-letters) SM. L. O. P c {Tt, q) t Flat or Medial. h 9 cl Aspir&ted. i (none). B it 1 2 PAKT8 OF SPEECH. «• ITie Liquids are /, in, n, r. lie Sibilants are s, x, and z. X m conijiounded ot c.v or gs : QB, dux = duc8 a leader ; lex = regH, a king. X and z are Bomotimes called double conwonantH. The /Semivowels are ^ and v. Obi. 2. Q la used only before u : as, sfiquor, I follow. § 6. K Diphthong is the blended eo-ond of two vowels meeting in one syllable. The diphthongs are ae ,^ au which are in common use; and eu, ei, ui, wliich occiir in only a few words. Ohs. The diphthongs ae («p), oe (a), arc pronounced as I. § 7 A 5yMe consists of one or more lettei-s pronounced together, and having only one vowel sound A Syllable is either short, long, or doubtful, according m the vowel belonging to it is pronounced rapidly, or slovvly or sometimes rapidly and sometimes slowly. This charac- teristic of a vowel or syllable is called its quantity. A short vowd 18 marked by (-) : as, pftter, a father. Ohs. A vowel folLwed by another vowel is usually short : as, ptter, a hoy. A long vowel is marked by (-), and may be either long by nature : a« mater, a mother; or long by position : as, mensa, a ^^W« ; dux a leader. A vowel is long by position, when It 18 followed by two or more consonants or by a double consonant. "^ Ohs. 1. These marks of Quantity were not used by the Latin writers • sfirvin., only for grammatical purposes. ^" ' s^'ving Ohs. 2. AU diphthongs are long by nature : as, iQrile, hreezes. A douhtfvi vowel is sometimes short, sometimes lone- as am6 or amo, / lo^e, tenebra© or tenebrae, darkmss. ' ' Ohs. A vowel is doubtful when followed by a mute and a liouid Gsupniftiiv I or r: as, dtlplex or dQplex, two/old; tenebrae or SLiratfarlZss!^'' f>,ifiVTtr^'' ^"""^^ °*' *^« syllables the accent is on the hrst syllable : as, musa, a muse, dolus, deceit In words of three or more syllables the accent is on the lafit syllable but one, if this syllable is long: as HomLr aMon^an; or on tlie last syllable but two, if the 4t syllable but one is short : as, dominus, a lord. j "<*»*» • 13. PARTS OF SPEECH. Chapter II.— Parts OF Speech. Inflexion. Stem. § 9. Thoro are eight parte of speech : I. The Noun Suu.stantivk, or simply Substantivk, is the name (iNomen; of a person or thing: as, Caesar, Caesar- vlr, a man ; ddmus, a houae ; virtfis, valour. Ob,. Names of pernons nnd pluce« aro called Pioper Nount: aU other Buh. •tantive. are called Common .Youn, or AppeilatL,. ^ II. The Noun Adjicciivk, or simply Ai.jKcriVE (Adiec- tlviim, joined to), m joined to a Substantive to express ite quality or nature : as, bonus vir, a (JockI m. h. III. The Pkonoun (rronomen) is used instead of a Sub- stantive : as, ego, 1; tQ, tkoa. IV. The Vkhh (Verbum, word) is the word by which we make an assertion about something : as, equus cun-it, the horse runs ; vir sedet, the man sits. _ y. The Advkrb (Adverbium) is joined to Verbs. Ad- jectives, and other Adverbs, to qualify their meanir as celerlter cumt, he runs quwkly ; mftgis plus, raore dutiful] satis dm, long enough. "^ YI. The Prepositiox (PraepSsItio) is placed before Sub- stantives to mark their relation to other words : as, In, in ; habito In urbe, i dioell in the city. VII. The Conjunction (Conjunctio) unites words and sen- tences : as, ^t and; iit, in order that : vir et femlna, the man and tfiemman^dimm m vivamus, we eat in ai^der that we may live. yill. The Interjection anterjectio) is a word of excla mation : as, heu, alas ! § 10. There is no article in the Latin language: thus domus may be translated by either house, or a houfe, or the house. ;J V*i®'i'^''.*'^!J' Miectives, Pror ans, and Verbs are mflected : that is, their final syUables are changed in order to mark their number or relation to other words • 1? y^n'^r ^^ Substantives, Adjectives, and Pronouns ifl called Declension meclemio) : the inflexion of Verbs is called Conjugation (Oonjugatio). Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections are not inflected, and are frequently called Particles. § 12. The Stem of inflected words is that part of the word which remains after the changeable endings are taken away : thus, in trab-s, a plank, trSb-ls, of a plank, trab-i, to a pjanA the Stem is trab: and in leg-o, / read, leg-is, thou readest, the Stem is leg. ** b2 ^ '^ I f THE SUBSTAi!^TIVE. Chapter IIi.-The Substantive. §18. § 13. There are three Gendert • i'ha. m t rJ^t\!^^^^^^'^^ two Numbers /^NiimeriV +I.0 O" 7 § 15. There are six Cases (Dasus) • f61ia arb6r„l ^ttL^Vl^r " '''"""^' '"* "^''^^ '«-.• «/« « fo (fe Zte^ "•"*'^ '^' "^^ '••'""" '"agistro, / ^« was *,%<: mth a spea,- \Jm» t' « "terfeetfls est, & nifies motion or fepait^; tm ■ t Srii- I* t° ^'S' /rom i^ome. ^ - '"" ^'■' "^o noma, / depart § 16. All the Substantives in thti T,i.t;„ i. arranged in five classes, called r.eolensi^>n« If *«^ T »» J» »» 2nd 3id 4th 5th 5> »> I IS us ei in..„i ^ •> '"^ '-eim, nations um or n"* it must not be eupl posed that these cases can always be thus translated. ^ .,nSf ?f """T^-^ Substantives of the First Declension are Feminine unless they designata males : as, nauta (masc.), a sailor. ^'"'""»®' Examples for Declension, hora, an, hour. sllva, poena, a punishment. stella, femlna, a woman. via porta, a gate. ala, barba, causa, coena, a wmg. a beard. a cause, a supper. a wood, a star, a tpay. victoria, a victory. Obg. 1. The stems of all substantives of the first declension end in a. Obs 2. The Genitive Singular ended originally in as (a contraction otais) or ftH?. ^°* '«^!?.* 'l^""^''^' ^''^^^ compounded .,-ith pater, Ser, fflTuB patiTfamlli 8, &c. In poetry the old form of the Genitive ai irstead o m, IS sometimee found : as, aqum; ofthn water; terraY, of the earth aiJ^t'^'^v' ^■""'''^ ^^'"""^^ substantives ends in «>/» Instead of arum The ending in nm is found in the compounds of c6ia and ggna • as coellcSlum from coellcola, an inhabitant of heaven ; terrTgc-rum fi-fm ten?! gena earth^orn: also iudrachmum, amihorum, from dracSmaV amphci ^^tk-^^Y ^f''^ c^nd Ablative Plural of some words end in abm- as deabas f.om dea, a goddess} flliubus from filia, a daughter. Th s endi^t distinguishes hem from corresponding masculine ?ubstanthes o? Se «cond declension: as, dels from deus, a god; flliis from ftl us, « it So likewise duabus from duae, t^oo ; ambabus from ambae. both Lt (T^. § 18. Declkxsiox of Grjcek Surstantives. Greek Substantives of tliis declension employed in Latin end in -- *r^, c* in the Nominative Singular, and are thus declinedT- ^' Feminine. Mom. £pTtom-e, abridgment (ion. EpItat. Ei)l;8m-ae Ace. Kpltfini-en Voo. Kprt8m.€ Abl. Eptt8m-fi Masculine. Aene-as (proper name) Aene-ae AenC'-ae Aene-an (am) Aene-a Masculine. AiicliTs-Cs (proper namej AnchTs-ao Auchls-ao AnchTs-en (am) Anchl8-e (a, ft) Aaoh!8-e (a). • 6 # SECOND DECLENSION. «1». Chapter V.-The Second Declension. Neuter Substantrves in 2 '"^^^ "^ *» ^^^ «' «-)' and of -_ Sing. JVOTO. D8niln.ii8, aZord ^ew Domln-I, o/aZorc? nat D6min.6, to or for a lord Ace. Domin-um, a lord Voe D6min.e. Zo/d lalo,d. AM. D6min.6, by, with, or from A. Masculine, t Sing. Aow. Magiater, a master ^ew. Magistr-i, of a master JJat. Magistr-o, toorforamaster ACC' ssagiatr-van, a master yoe. MSgister, master Plur. Domln-I, lords Ddmin-orum, of lords DoaUn-is, to or for lords Dom!n-6s, ZortZ* Domin-i, fo,^, j-^^^^^ Ddmln-is, by, with, or /ror* 2. •Plur. Magistr-i, masters Magistr-orum, of masters Magistr-is, to or for masters ■Magistr-os, masters MaSte-U hyZTthTorfromlm^Zt f^^t'* . a master. '^^S^^^'^^' H mth, or from masters. Nom. Pugr, Gen. Puer-i, Puer-6, Puer-um, Puer, Puer-o, Sing. Dat Ace. Voc. Abl. a boy of a boy to or for a boy a boy boy Ihoy, ^y,vnth,oxfroma B. 8. Plur. ■ Pu5r-i, boys Puer-orum, of boys Pu3r-ia, to or /or boyt Puer-os, boys Puer-i, boys Puer-is. Hmth, 01 fr(m boys. „. — Muter. omg. Nom. Eegn-um. a kingdom , Keen a i. ^^1' Oen. Regn-i, of akinadom *«&»-?» A;engr(Z(,m« ^«<. Regn-6, toorforatZdom S^^""^' o/^^rfom* ^«o. Regn-um, a /fc^^l "^'^'"* J^^f^f' ^« ^^'M kingdoms kingdoi. ^®^-"' '''2'' ,?*^^. or >,« „ ' Kingdoms. are Feminine; ihtiimef "f T^^^^^^^^^^ «^"l? Secopd Declension a pear-tree, Ourintlius. Corinth^ I J^f' ^"^ Countries : as, pJrus. aie grouna, alvus. ^Aeftky. eg us. adiLffZ^r^^'' ^"'^« •" «^' ^""^^^ 2. Three in «« are Neuter viruf *^' "' " «'"'«''«'%/««. valgus, the multitude. l^hX^^'I^L^ZZ'^f^T '^" ""'""'• ""'^ §1». SECOND DECLENSION. 3. ^M Neuter Substantives have the Nominative. Accusative, and Jirys'e'ndTuT '''''^"'^''''* "^^ inthePluml these cies Examples for Declension like ddmfnds. dbus, food. liipus, a wolf. niimSrus, a number. malus (/.), an apple-tree, annus, a year. ramus, a branch. rtvus, a stream. ulmus (/.), an elm. nidus, a nest. liortus, a garden. cervus, a stag, lir^nus {f.), a plum-tree &ger, afield. Sper, a 6oar. Examples for Declonsion like mdgistifr. cmcer, a crab. I fftber, a smith. caper, a he-goat. \ Uber, a 600A. Examples for reclension Hkepugr. sScer, a father-in-law. I ggner, a son-in-^aw. I Liber. Parrhuj. vesper, ^.m«^. | adulter, an adulterer. \ libSrt (plu.), SXn.' NoTK 1. The above are the only Substantives in er which preserve the ^ in «n the cases. The Adjectives which preserve the e are given in § se^X 1. Note 2. rcsj»er is irregriilar. See § 53, Obs. 2. donum, a gift. tectum, a roof. Examples for Declension like r^fnum. scfltum, a shield. I bellum, tear, vinum, wine. \ tem]pliim, a temple. HWnn ^' °^*" substantives of the second declension end in as dSmIno regno pu«ro mSgistero. The mminative SingularZ^lSy ended m da and the Accusative in om : as, d8mln8.s, d6mL-m • SSs a^rSX-s, JeUtrf ™?^" ^"^ ^°^*^ ^^^^ ^ ^^ ^-"^ ^-^ '"- • 06*. 3. The Vocative Singular of flUus, « son, gSnius, a guardian spirit and Laell, ioc/tM« ; TuUl, 2\<«tt«. y »»' »kj7» «ptm , ^*f« in3^ w?'"' ^^"''?^ °^ '""'^ ^"'»'*^^ ^°^^ i° «»« ii^stead of <7r«m. This 18 especially the case with words signifying money, weights, measures and trades : as. nummum from nummus, a piece o/mon^T sestotS from sestertms, a sesterce, a silver coin (about 2d.) / mddium from Sus « Boman corn-measure, a peck ; fabrum, from fdber, a smith ' ^ti; S"^ o°;y substantives of the second declension ending in ir are vir a 7 k' T.^'^'r' *°-' ^'^^ **« compounds, triumvir, &c.: and levfr W « husband's brother, a brother-in-lato. ' ' "*' " 06». 6. DeQs, fi'od, is decUned in the following manner : Sing. Nam. Detts, God Gen. Del, 0/ fforf Dat. Deo, •,?« Declension so^e- ^om. Orpheus Gen. Orphei, Orphei I>at. Orph^o •dxic. OrphSum f'oc. Orpheu Abl. Orphfio Orphgus Orphgos Orpha, Orplxl Orphea Orpheu ttfl Georgica. "* ""^ **»»• ^s, Georglcon libri. tha books § \ Chapteb VI.^The Thihd Declension. 4^D^^ntrr^^^ of tl,e end m some consonant orT '"• ^^^^^ «tenis A. Mascvline and Feminine Substantives mulfp".\^tf^^ end in tLe Iabi.1 §22. THIRD DECLENSION. 9 Nom. Trab-s (f.), a beam ^««. Trfi,b-Is, of abeam Dat. Trab^l, to or /or a beam Ace. Tr&b-em, a beam Voc. Trab-s, beam [beam. Ml. TrSb-e, hy, with, or from a Sing. 2. Nom. Princep-s (m.), a chief Gen. Princip-is, of a chief Bat. Princip-i, to ot for a chief Ace. Princlp-em, a chief Plur. Tr9,b-os, beams Trab-um, of beams Trab-ibus, to or for beams Trab-es, beams Trab-es, beams Trab-ibus, by, with, or from heams. Plur. Princlp-es, chiefs Princip-um, of chiefs Princip-ibils, to ox for chiefs Princip-es, chiefs Voc ^ceps chief [a chief I Princip-es, chiefs [chiefs AM. Pnncip.g. by, u,ith, or from 1 Princip-ibus, by, with, or frL Sing. Nom. Hiem-s (f.), lointer Gen. Hiem-Is, of winter Dat. Hiem-^i, to or for winter Ace. Hiem-em, lointer Voc. ffiem-s, O winter [winter. Abl. Higm-e, by, with, or from Sing. Nom. ITrb-s (f.), a city Gen. Urb-ifl, of a city ITrb-i, to or for a city Urb-em, a(nty ITrb-s, city [city, X^rb-g, by, with, or from a Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. 8. Plur. Hiem-es, winters Hiem-um, of winters Hiem-ibtls, to or for tointert Hiem-es, winters Higm-es, winters [ters. Higm-ibiis, by, with, or from win- ^ Plur. Urb-es, cities Urb-imn, of cities TTrb-ibils, to or for cities Urb-es, cities Urb-es, cities Urb-ibiis, by, with, or from cities. Obs. 1. When a monosyUabic Stem ends in two consonants the «/.« «7 -«h. 1. Plur. ■Ofic-es, leaders Sing, ^om. Dux (eg.), a leader Gen. Diic-is, ofalo'^r Dttc-i, to or y^i^ . , leader Duc-eni, a leader T)UT. O lon/Jm. r7^„J-„ Buc-g, Ay, with, or /row a Ace. Voc. Abl. Dflc-um, of leaders Dfic-ibus, to or for leaders Duc-es, leaders Bue-es, f> ieacfer* Dfio-ibOa, by, with, or from leaders B 3 10 THIRD DECLENSION. §23. Sing. yom. lex (f.), o law Gen. Leg-lB, of a law Dat. Lgg.i, to or for a law Ace. Lgg-em, a law ^00. Lex, Olaw [;««,. »• Plur. LSg-Ssi lawa Leg-um, of laws Leg.'l)fis, to or for lam LSg-eSi towa I-Sg^s. laws ^ Mg^, hy, mth. or from a I Wg.M., 6y. t^Yft, or^om ?a„«. Sing. Norn. JMn{c.),ajudge (ren. Jfldlc-Is, of a Judge Dat. Jfldlc-I, to OT for a judge Ace. Jmcem, a Judge Voc. Judex, Oj'ttdgrfl f-y^^e. Abl. Jiidlc-g, by, toith, or from a 3. Plur. Judges JUdlcSs, Jfldlc-um, of Judges I Jadlc-Ibils, to or for Judges Jfldlo^s, y»(d^e« Jfldlc-Mg, 6y, with, or /om Sing, ^om. Arx (f.), a citadel Gen. Aie-U, of a citadel Arc-i, to OT for a citadel Arc-em, a citadel Arx, citadel [citadel Arc-g, by, with, or from a 4. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. Plur. Arc-es, citadels Arc-Ium, of citadels Arc-Ibilg, to or for citadeU Arc-es, citadels Arc-es, O citadels Arc-Ibiis, by, with, or from dtadeh. f« f/.)r pax (/.), fornax (/.), vox (/.), rftciix (/.), rex (w.), legs. cause Examples fbr Declension. ntlc-is, fSc-is, pac-is, fornSc-is, v6c-is, radlc-is, reg-is, a nut. a torch, peace, an oven, a voice, a root, a king. grex (m.), remex (m.), poUex (m.), index (c), vertex (»».), merx (f.^, gi-6g-is, remlg-is, polllc-is, indlc-is, vertlc-is, falc-is, nierc-is, afl(,ck. a rower, the thumb, an informer, an eddy, a sickle, "ier handise. and gs are contracted into x : as dux \r,«t.>^A «# ^ , In nix, mou>. Gen. nlv-is, k? „"i^&^l°/t"°-«' ^^? ^'t^-'d ol the Stem originally ended in a giutural. ' "' *"'^' ^° '» **• denM-nxSes ,^f ^^^^^^^ ^« Stems of which end in the Sing. Nom.hat?^{l\anage Gen. AetaWs, of an age Dat. Aetat-I, to or for an age Aetat-em, an age Aeta-s, age lan age. Aetat-g, bv. with, nr /.«». - ' -- J-^ Ace. Voc AU. 1- Plur. I Aetat-es, ages I Aetat-um, of ages Aetat-ibiis, to or /or ages Aetat-es, ages Aetat-es, O ages "y, with, or from age*. §24. THIRI^ l)l!]CT,ENSrON. n Sing. Nom. L&pl-s (m.), a stone Oen. Lapld-ig, of a stone L&pld-i, to or for a stone L&pld-em, a stone I&pl-s, stone [a stone Dat. Ace. Voc. All. ^ Plar. [ LJ^pId-es, stimes Lapid-um, of stones L&pld-Ibiis, to or for stones Lapld-es, stones L&pld-es, O stones U?id4, by, with, or from I lipId-IbilB, by, with, or from iUrneB. Sing. Nom. Mng-s (c), asoldier Gen. MiUt-is, of a soldier Dat. Wmt-i, Ace. mUt-em, Voc. Mflg-s, Abl. MiUt-g, to or for a soldier a soldier soldier [soldier, by, loith, or from a 8. Plur. Millt-es, soldiers Millt-om, of soldiers Mnit-ihilfl, to or for soldiers MiQIt-es, soldiers Millt-es, soldiers [diers. Mnit-Ibils, by, with, or frrni sol- Sing. Nom. Mon-s (m.), a mountain Gen. Mont-is, of a mountain Mont-i, to or for a mountain Mont-em, a mountain Mon-8, mountain Mont4, by, with, or from a mountain. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. *. Plur. Mont-es, mountains Mont-Ium, of mountains Mont-!biis, to or for mountain f Mont-es, mountains Mont-es, mountains Mont-ibfis, by,with, or from moun- tains. civltas (/.), civitat-is, a state. virtus (/.), virtut-is, virtue. sftcerdos (c.) , sacerdot-is, a priest, priestess. cassis (/.;, cassKd-is, a helmet. corags (c), comrt-is, a companion. Examples for Declension. obses (c), obsld-is, a hostage. pars (/.), part-is, apart. serpens (c), serpent-is, a serpent. ars (/.), art-is, an art. frons (/.), front-is, a forehead. Ohs. 1. Tand*? are dropped before s: as aeta a l8nV q ™tix - , of aetat-s, ISpid-s. mUet-s, mont-s ' ^ ' °'^*"''' '"°°-'' '"'^^^'^ Sing. iVom. Consill (m.), a consul Gen. Consiil-is, of a consul Consiil-i, to or for a consul Consill-em, a consul Consiil, O consul f^/\v%ti%%l X 7.-. J.. 'IT - Vv±isiu-s, uy, icuh, or /roJtt « cowJmZ. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. Consiil-gB, ConsiU-nm, ConsiU-ibiia, Consiil-Qs, Consiil-es, Gousul-ibus, Plur. consuls of consuls to or for consuls consuls consuls by, with, or from consuls. 12 THIRD DEOLENfiTON. §24 Dat Aco. Voo. AU. ^^-' «. Plur y(m. CiamJJr (m.), a ehout i ciftm8r in .t.' * aamfir-I, to or for a shout ClS,mmhiiBioTi^r,i. , Cl&m6r-em, a ahout ciamSr Sa 1 ^ ^^ uiamor, o shout [a «Aom^ ClamSr-fia n .i. 2 Sing. Norn. Aii8«r(m.), a goose Oert, Anser-lB, of a goose Ansgr-i, to or for a goose AnBer-em, a goose Anagr, goose la goose. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. Ansgr-g, 8' Plur. , Ang^-ea, geese I Anagr-um, 0/ geese Ansgr-ibfls, to 01 for geeao Ansgr-es, geese Anagr-es, O geese oy, wjf^, or from Anagr-Ibfia Z»y ,w/* «. / ., • Plur. Opgr-um, 0/ irorA;* Opgr-Ibtts, to or for works Op8r-&, worft* Op8r-i, O work$ Opgr-IbfiB, 6y, M«-«' » ' (*• ATom. Mir-*, M&rli, H&r-I, M&r-I, M&r-S, M&r-I, Gen. Dat. Ace, Voc. Abl. Sing. thf, tea of the sea to or /or the tea the aeu O sea [g^„_ fry, with, or from the *• Plur. Mir-U, seas M4rlum, of seas M&r-ibiii, toorfitrttat M&r 14, ««((« Mir 14, «ea« M4r-Ibila, by, with, or /row seas. Nom Qen. Dat. Ace, Voc. Abl. Sing. AnIm&I, an animal Anlm41-l8, of nn animal Anlm41-I, to or for an animal Aiilm41, an animal Anlm41, animal Anlmai-i, by, with, or from an animal. 8. Animal- 14, Animai-Ium, Anlmai-lbOa, Anlmai-i4, Anlmai-I4, Anlmai-IbilB, IMiir. animala of animals to or for animals animals animala by, with, or from animals. rets, a net. ' fivIlS, a sheepfold. Examples for Declension, vectlgai, a tax, I cakar, ' a f^lr in .-. aee §§ 31, 32 ' '^''"" '"'^"*'^' ^'"»- «='^l«ar. Hence the Ml. 8 SO. The following irregular Substantives are thus declined : Sing Ifom, Bos Gen. BSv-Ts Dat. B8v-I 4cc. B5v-em Too. Bos **/. B8v.6 BSs i^c.), on ox or cow. Plur. BSv-Cs B5"-um or bS-um R<' 'fls or ba-bil8 Uov-es liov-Cs Bo-bQs or bQbtls. w Sing. It& Ittnfr-Ts ItKner-l Iter iter itlngr-S SSnex, an Sing. Jfom. SSnex Gen. Sen-lfs S6n-I SSn-em Senex Iter, a Journey. Plur. Ittaer-a Ittner-um itKner-Kbfls ItKner-a ittofir-a .^trner-ftfls. J)at Aco. Voc. Ml. old man, Plur. S6n-es Sen-um Sen-Ibas Sen-g8 Sen-cs Sfin-lbtts JQpIter {=J6v.pMr, «. e. pater), the god. JQpIter J8v-to J8r.I Jfiv-em Jupiter J6v.6. VTs h'')iii-ngth. Plur. Vlrium Tts Vis VI Vim Vis VI Vlrlbtls Vires Vires Virlbiia jo.srr-i's^^.'^^j-s™- -i^sT^'^ - I 45. THIUO DECLENSION. 17 IlEMAIlKS ON THE CaSES OF THE TiUllD DkCLEN.'ION. §81-82. Stoma in i have frvqucntlv the Ace Rinn i.. 4m «.« jii Sing, in I. an.l tl.o Ace VI. in U. ^ 'nZ^^, aro%fto^od^acci„W ^owoirir "^ ''"'■'^" "' ""'^^' ^^^^^^^ ot wiuch tirstr end !s Jco. Sing. pnpi>i-m, like mensa-ra. grftdu-in, die-m. ^cfl. PZ. pupp.-s, „ xnon8tt-0, gmdu-B, disV Out many bucIi words follow tlio analon-v of wnrrla of ♦!.« ♦».:,i i clcnHion. tho Stems of wlach end in a co Jonant "'*' ""'"^ '^^^ § 35, 36. Stems in i have tho Gen. PI. in turn with the followinir oxoeptions :-jftvi;m» a youth; vatos. « 2>rophet; c&nis a C- voSs a ft.rcf ; wluch have tho (Jen. javflnum. vatum. cftnum vOlaLm S 1. The following words have also the Gen. in fum, not um: tmbfir (imbrium), m. rain. at«r (utrium), m. a baff made of leather. lintfir (lintrium), m. a wherry. InsiiI)Sr(In8ubrium), in. name of a Gallic tribe. di.ro (camium),/. flesh. venter (veutrium), m. & tenSr^s proud. sacred, sick. lean. beautiful. red. left. free, wretched. §59. DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. P- iKger. Bxtfirum tnd full OffC9d, m. lie— N. tr-um tr-uin tr-6 ( another. rivls. The 7. In the ry. . v<<.-_ » I 28 .1 t' ^^J^^*'^^« 5^^^^^ Terminations of the second class T^- ^1^'' r"' "' "^^rnf ^ ^^^^^^^ ^^^ Substantives of the Ihird Declension They have thiee t^nninations in the IS ominativo and Vocative Singular only : in aU other cases they have only two terminatio^ : a., aci, acris, i^^ M. Norn. Acer Gen. Acris Dai. Acri Ace. Voc. Abl Acrem Acer Acri Siug. acris acris N. &cr8 &crg acre Plur. M. and F. Acres Acriam Acribtis Acres Acres Acrib&B N. &orI& ficri& acri& ^*l/J''/'m™''"'"°" ^ " sometimes, but verj ra:ely,, 'oiind in the ^om. There are only thiiieen Adjectives o^ this kind : acer, filacer, campester, c6ler, c6l6ber, gquester, pQter, volilcer, terrester, paiuster, pSdester, saluber, Silvester. volficer, &l&cer, campester, c61er, cgjgber, 6quester, pdter, lively. level. quick, crowded. equestrian. rotten. terrester, paiuster, pSdester, saluber, Silvester, winged, pertaining to the earth. marshy, pedestrian, healthful, woody. ""ii^. S!^" """ '"""'™ ""« "^ «» «"■»'»«»" •* in their™.. yj f'J}' ^^'^'^"^ Of' Two Terminations are declinGd S ^H^"',!?' °K^t ™'^ Declension : a«. trkB« w. sad ; altior, altius, higher (§ 63). as, tnstJs, triste, Fern. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. Igvis, levis, gravis, dulci&, Sing. M. and b\ Trist-is Trist-is Trist-i Trist-em Trist-is Trist-i light. N. tri8t>§ trist>g trist-e M. and F. Trist-es Trist-iom Xrist-ib^ Trist-es Trist-es Trist-ibils Plur. N. triBt.i& trist-ia trist-i& smooth, heavy, sweet. Szunples fbr Declension, brgvis, short. fortis, brave. turpis, disgraceful. dndlis, lihe. mollis, soft, f&cllk, easy. vilis, cheap. hiimilig, low. 24 COBIPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. §60 mte; J^iUdem, prudent. * imix^fortu- Sing. M. and F. Norn. Fgliz Gen. Felio-Is Dat. Felic-i Ace. Felic-em Voc. Felix Abl Felic-i or § Sing, M. and F. Nom. Prudens Gen. Priident-Is Dat. Pradent-i Ace. Prudent-em Voc. Prudens Abl. Prudent-iorg 1. N. fells fSIiz Plur. N. prjldens prtldenB M. and F. Felic-es Felic-ium FeUc-ibils Felic~es Felic-es Felic-ibiis 8. Plur. M. and F. Prudent-es PrQdent-ium Prudant-ibus Priident-es Prudent-es Prudent-ibiis audax, vSriix, loquax, velox, ftiox, acis, aois, acis, ocis, ocis, bold truthful. talkative, swift. haughty. Examples for Declension. p6ti>ns, mgens, diligens, sapiens, praesens. entis, entis, entis, entis, entis, N. fellci& felic-i& felic-i& N. prQdent-Ia prudent-!& prudent>!& powerful. huge. diligent. wise, present. Oba. 3. Some Adjectives are indeelimliio • o.. Chapteb XL— Compaeison of Adjectives Positive. alttts, high. Comparative. altiSr, higher. Supei-lative. altissImOs, highest. f?EsS53^"-^'-^'''--is §60 r are declined 8, folix^fortu- r. N. felIo.i& felio.i& fellc.i& N, prfldenwa prudenWa prudent-!& powerful. huge. diligent. wise. present. ur, in turn, sec dis, dlt« ; Gen. TtMess; frQgl, :I hSmS, frQgl PIVES. I'e usually 3 Degrees : e. gliest. f, and the iiial vowel §65. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 26 Comp. Sup. Potit. Nona. Stem. its itY '& fi".''. alWasIma,. s. si.. Sr »ik E&. § 6.3. The Comparative is an Adiectivo nf TV,« rn nations, having ior in thfi TVnm q- "^ rTf ,, "^^^ Termi- Nom. Gen, Dat. Ace, Voe. AM. Sing, M. and K. AltiSr Altior-Is AItior>i Altior-em Altior N. altiiis altiiis altiiis Altior^ rarely -I — M. and F. Altior-es Altior-nm Altior-ibils Altior>es Altior-es Altior-lbus Plur. N. alti5r-& altidr-& altior-& § 64. The Superlative is an Adiectivo of Th.-^^ t- . § 65. Exceptions. 1. Adjeotiyes ending in e, form the Superlatiye in Hn,e. . as, Posit pulcliSr, beautiful liber, free, acSr/ 8/iarp, cSl6r, sioift. Comp, pulchr-i6r, Iib6r-i6r, acr-i6r, c6lSr-i6r, Sup. pulcher-rimfls. liber-rimQs. acer-rimds. cfiler-rlmfla. Comj). f?lcn-i8r, diflflcri-iSr, slmil-ior, disslmll-ior, gracIl-iSr, liQmn-i6r, Potit. ftcllfe, diflfrcllls, slmHJs, disslmllls, gracilis, httmlUs, easy, difficult, like, unlike, tliin, low. Sup. fScil-lImtis. diflflcil-limfig. simil-llmas. disslmil-llmfts. gracU-lImiis. hflmil-llmtia. a COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES. j tb t^^Ltllf JoiS'tW'^^'"^" a vowel before the tennination MS, usually torm the Comparative by prefixing the AA^rc.r•\^ ma^s, rmre, and the Supirlative by^prefix4| tiTe Adverb ful, maxiine noxius, mo6'« hurtful. ' '^ § 66. Irregular Comparison. Some Adjectives are compared irregularly ; as Posit. bOnfts, maitts, magntts, parvQs, multtts, nequam \ good, had, great, email, much, worthless, frugi {indecl) frugal. Comp. mClirtr, major, mInSr, plus (pi plures, plQra). nequlor, frugalior, Sup. opttmttg pessImOs maxJmaa mlnlmQs plurlmfls nequisslmfls frugalissIrnQs. Ob,. I. Sometimes one or more of the Degrees of Compari«on are wanting: as. Posit. Comp. g senex old, 86„,6r ^^azimus natu) __ d§t6ri5r, worse, deterrlmiis __ ociar, swifter, ocissYmtts nSviis, new, ''"^'' ^''"""'' r>r:lm^xs, first novisslmtts. as. nio„„\ ^v ;, . iWMwue ^ine correspoi place), or the Positive has a different meaning ^''""'- (^<»np. ^^„ 9:!^ontMssid^, f^,rnoreontMssiae,mra,.,)^tontMssuie. 7 ,1* , .; -•"'^/» Alienor, more on t (ultra, on the farther side), ult^rifir, frtr^Aer. (extra, on the outside, with- extJ^riSr, o«/er. (infra, below), (intra, within), (prcipe, near), (post, o/if«r), (aupra, aJorc), [out), inforiSr, lower, intgriSr, inner, prSpiSr, nearer, posteriSr, later, sttpgriSr, upper, ultlmfls, farthest. extremfis, outermost. inffrnfls (Imus), lowest. intimfls, or Tmfls, innermost. proxlmtls, nearest. postremtts, last. supremiis, or snmmus, up. permost. Note.— .Interns is used only in Inl^rum M&r« th^ r^.^^ „ . 3. §<)<». f 72. THE NUMERALS. 27 Sup. efUcentissTmd*. Jflcontiaslmflfl. Svfilentisslmds. he termination ig the Adverb g the Adverb ius, more hurt- as, Sup. optlmtis pesslmtla maxfmaa mlnlmfla plurlmfls nequisslmfls frugalisslmas. are wanting : as, Jup. %ua natv) nu8 natu) (mtis itis 3, first (mfla. tions of time ai sition takiiig us •ip. wat on this side. 'arthest. mtertnost. lus), lowest. [mils, innermost. Barest. last. •r suinmus, up- .ower Sea, i. o. 1 Inflrl, ae, 5, y in Sfipgrum Plural Sflpfiji, Numeral Chapter XII.— Ti § 67. Cardinal Numerals denote numbers simply or abso- lutely : as, unus, one ; duo, two ; tres, three. § 68. Onus, flna, flnum, is declined like ullus. See § 57. Ohs. Unm la used in tlic Plural with Plural Substantives which have a singular meaning : as, Qntt castrtt, one camp ; Qnae uedCs, one house. Duo and Tres are declined as follows : M. F. N. Nom. Su-o dn-ae duo Gen. Da-drum Dat. Du-obiis Ace. Du-os du-as du-o Ahl. Du-obils du-abii:: du-obiis du-arum du-orum du-abiis du-obtis M. nnil F. Tres Trium Trlbas Tres (>r tris Tribiis N. tr!& trl& Obs. Ambo, both, is declined like duo. § 69. The Cardinal Numerals from quattuor, four, to centum, a hundred, are indeclinable. Ducenti, ae, S,, two hundred, and the following hundreds, are declined regularly. Mille, a thousand, is an indeclinable Adjective ; but in the Plural it is a declinable Substantive : as, Nom. milligi. Gen. raillium. Bat. millibiis. Ace. millia, Abl. millibtis. Obs. I. In the Plural milliil is regularly followed by the Genitive: as, trift millia hSmtnum, three thousand men. But if smaller Numerals follow, the Genitive is not used : as, tria milliii trficentl hSmines, three thousand three hundred men. Obs. 2. The numbers Letween 20 and 100 are expressed either by the larger numeral first without it, or by the smaller numeral first with St : as, viginti flnils, or unils.et viginti, tweniij-one. The numbers above 100 always have the larger number first : as, centum 6t sexaginta sex, or centum sexaginta sex, one hundred and sixty-six. Obs. •\. The numbers 18, 19, 28, 29, &c., have the smaller numeral first with the preposition <^e to indicate subtraction: as, duodevIgintI,unde viginti, &c. § 70. Ordinal Numerals denote numbers regarded as form- ing parts of a series ; and hence they have a relative signifi- cation : as, pilnius, first ; secundus or alter, second. They are declined regularly as adjectives ; see § 56. Obs. Dates of years are expressed by anntls with the ordinal numeral : as, annfls milleslmtts octingentesKmOs sexSgesImtts primtis, the year 1861.' § 71. Distributive Numerals denote numbers regarded as constituting groups, each group being treated as a unit ; and these Latin numerals may be translated in various ways : as, bini, two each, two together, two hy two. § 72. Numeral Adverbs denote the number of times that J -ii— .j5 .i«pj^v/U(j •L^i x(3 vlOIiC . ao, Sciiicl, {JllCa i UlH, I'lVlCii } tfjl', « « ts ,2 >S >! a.i 51 193 ■&«^-&fiiiiliilill||iir^ s a cr 3 El J •S 1^ !rt S sb-3 ^ 'P 6C a S § i« S'fl t^ Oi+2 > o 3 7j a o « fl ^ i-H tiD ■« ■« § ^ ^ >5^ i '2 « § ;§ ,S "S "a a m _r« zl S-ia? 9^ ^ :: i.-h a-djs &5.'g Srg a IS a > 13 -^ •Bb3 IfH — a g ► 04 I $78. 178. THE NUMERALS. 29 10) 3 3 ■a '3 'p fe ^ 3 si 3 10) IfH 00 ^ 2 'S $ 'P ^ 'P 3 IfH «-l I— • 3 > O4 03 >i 04 QOOOOO O O 1:^ 2 00 o o c o ft O O -^ »*i •-* M ooco o o o o SS§§§§^gg§§§§§§g§§§oo§go iHINCO'.JiinOt-QOOJOOOOOO !-l « O 00 00 o o o' o ^ 80 THE PRONOUNH. |T« Chapteh XIII.— The I^iionouns. § 74. The PrcnoniKs are : 1. PoiHonal Pronouns. 2. Kefloctive rrononnn. \ 3. Po8He8.sivo Pronouns. 4. Demonstrative Pronouns. 6. Determinative Pronouny. 6. Kolative Pronouns. 7. Interrogative Pronouns. 8. Indefinite Pronouns. 9. Correlative Pronouns. n.J^^^'*A'^'?"°x• b'^^o^ging to several of these classes are properly Adjectives. "* § 76. 1. Personal Proxouns. 1. -Pronoun of the First Person. Sing. pjyp^ Nom. £g8, Gen. Mel, Dat. MTVii, Aco. MS, Abl. Me, N6»» we Nostri and nostnun, of us Np^"» to or for ua 2°'' w« [/row M«. "O'^is, 5y, 4„iY/t, or I of me to or for me me by, with, or from me. 2. Pronoun of the Second Person. ^'»g- ■ Plur. ■ '^0« I V68, yg of thee Vestrianrivestrum, o/«ott to or for thee Vobla L t Othou V58 g"" 6y. ^«^•m and partake of the signiCtitn of V™bs.'^ '" Active. Imperfect. Amans, ^o^^w. i^M^wre. Imaturus, about to love. ^ Passive. Perfect Aniatus, loved. Ge>^ndive. Amandus, /^ to he loved. of Ll^uSTe'cW" '' l*^°*ly- Verbal Substantive Amatum, fo^ow.' AmatQ, inhmng, to beloved. cf. Ihe Gerund, which is also a Verbal ^nWo *• having four Cases : as, '^"bstantive, ^^«. Imandl, of lamng JJat. Amando, /or hvinq OS. ... _ . f ^^^^^o, by loving. '^re io^dT' °' ' ''''^'''^' ^-- *° tho Gerund i, supplied by the Infini. §8&. THE VERB. 37) § 87. Verbs have six Tensks (TemporS) or times, three expressmg 77nper>^ or unfinished action, and three express- ing Perject or finished action. ^ Imperfect Tenses. 1. Present. Amo, / i(yoe or / am laving. ^" t^^*' Amabam, 1 was loving. 3. Future. Amabo, I shall l r might be fores I ^^"^ mightst he iset foret, ^^^^^ °'' } he might be. 2, Past-Imperfect Tense. P. Essemiis or foremiis, Essetis or foretls, Essent or fSrent, We may he ye may be they may he. We might 6fc ye might he they might be. 3. Future Tense. Ffituriis aim, 1 may Ftituriis sis, thou mayst rUtllriis sit, he may P. Fiituri simiis, We may FutUri sitis, ye may Fiituri sint, they may 4. Perfect Tense. Fnerim, Fugris, Fugrlt, FtiiBsem, Ftiisses, Ftiisset, I may have been thou mayst have been he may have been. P. Fugrimtls, Fneritis, Fugrint, We may have been ye may have been they may have been. 5. Past-Perfect Tense. I might 1, thou mightst} J he might y^^' P. FuissemiiB, We might j^^g Fuissetis, ye might k Fuissent, they might ) INFINITIVE MOOD. Imperfect. Esse, to he. Perfect. Fuisse, to have been. Future. FiittLrum esse, or forS, to he about to be. PARTICIPLE. Future. Filtflriis, -a, -um, about to he. Ohs. 1. The Supine and Gerund are -wanting. The Present Participle is found only in Absens from Absum, and Praesens from Praesum. 06s. 2. The Verb has two Stems, es (whence esum, afterwards 'sum, and all the Imperfect Tenses), and/w (whence all the Perfect Tenses). Ohs, 3. Like Sum are conjugated its compounds : ' Absum, I am away. Adsum, I am present. DSsum, I am wanting. Insum, J am in, Intersum, 1 am present at. Obsum, I am .u the way. Praesum, I am before. Prosum, I am serviceable. Subsum, I am under. Stipersum, I am turviving. Prosum, however, takes d before e ; as, Sing. Prosum, Flur. Prosfimtts, Pr5des, Prodestis, Prodest, PrSsunt. Past-Imp, ProdSram. Future. Prodgro. Lnp. Inf. ProdessS. Qbs. A. Possum, lam able, is a contra ctionofi }5ti8 (pot)-sum, but is irregular Sing. Am^, FIIIST CONJUGATIOI^-ACTIVB. §91.-FIKST CONJUQATION.^AcTrvE Voxcb. »«i INDICATIVE MOOD. 1. PuESENT Tense. thou loveat he loves. 2. Past-Imi'ekpicct Texsi:. ^mgr. Am-abo, Am-abls, Am^Mt, Sing, Am-avl, Am-ivistl, Aia4l7it, 5'mgr. Am-avSram, Am-averas, Am^vgrSt, 3. Future Tense. thn^wiuLe I ^^"'*' S?"?JS?^«' We shall love he will love. \ I^'«J_?!' V^^HUove ~- ""'"w, 7/e wM love Am^bunt, they wm lave. 4. Perfect Tense thou hast laved, Am^^^^t °^ ^^ '<^ed or^AoMZtwerfgH ^^^-avistls, ye have loved, he has loved, or im s-- ^ . ^'^ X's ^oved he loved. ^TJ^T^W^ ^«^« loved, I orSm-averg/ or they hved, 5. Past-Perfect Tense. ^ he d loved I P7«« x^ - y . ^ thouhadstloved fclfe®"' ^« ''«^ ^o^«d he had laved f^f^l'*'^*' ye had hved ' Am^vgrant, theyhadloved. 6. Future-Perfect Tense. 5%. Am-avgro, ^ ,AaZZl r p/ |m-avgris, StIs, Am-ent, 2. Past-Imperfkct Tense. We may love ye may love they may love. I might love thou mightst lave he might love. P. Am-axSmtls, We might love Am-aretis, ye might love Am-arent, they might love. 3. Future Tense. 1 a o 8. Im-fttflrtls sim, / may 1 ^ „ Im-atllrtls sis, thou jnaj/afl-g -2 Am-attlriis sit, he may ' ~ "^ S. Am-&vSrim, Am-&vSrl8, lm-av§ri[t, 8. Am-avissem, Am-avisses, Am-avissSt, he '. Am-atflrlsimfis^TTfl may]'^ $• Am-atM sitis, ye mayl^M Am-atlM sint, they may) Z 5 4. Perfect Tense. P. Am-av8rimil8, We may], Am-avlritis, ye wow f "''^^ Am-avgrint, theymayr'''^ I may j , thou mayst}, '^^ I " 1 loved. *"• may y"""""" 5. Past-Perfect Tense. 1 might thou mightst he might P. Am-avissemiis, We might Am-avissetis, ye might Am-avisseut, they might INFINITIVE MOOD. Imperf. Am-arS, to love. Perfect. Am4lvis8e, [^°, '*«!f ' \ loved. Future. Am-attoun \tohe about (am, tun} esse,/ to love. GERUND. Gen. Am-andl, of loving Dat. Am-ando, Ace. Am>aiidnin, Ahl. Am-ando, for loving the loving by loving. Am-atnm, SUPINES. to love. I Am-ata, to le hoed. PARTICIPLES. Imperf. Am-ans (ntis), loving. Future. Am-aturtls (a, um), about to love. Ob$. In all the Perfect Tenses vi and ve may be omitted before s and r .• SmSvistl becomes .Imastl tlmavistls „ amastTs Smavgrunt „ amarunt : (but &maver6 does not become &mar^, which would be con- fuundcdwith ihc Imperf. Infin.). simavCram becomes tlmaram Smavdro amavSrim &mavissem amavissfi amSro amarim amassem amassgj 42 SECOND CONJUGATION-ACTIVE. 5 ,3. § 92.-SECOND CONJUGATION.-AcTivE Voick. M8ngo, mSnfil, m8nltuin, mmri,- to advise. S. MSn-So, Hdn-es, INDICATIVE MOOD. 1. PRE8ENT Tense. / advise thou advieest he advises. P. M5n-Smtt8, M8n^tl8, 2. Past-Imperpect Tense. We advise ye advise they advise. """""'• '«-*'•-■«/ I stiff; ij.vr.issj;^. 3. Future Tense. 55 "?Jv ' I i^'^oll advise JJ^tJJf' t^ou wilt advise M6n^Mt, he mil advise. 8. M8xi-ui, -T AoiJe advised, 01 __« . ^ I advised MSn-msti, Jttlrfi8'l7 may he about to sinit / advise USn-ItUriis'lf/tou mayst he ahout sis, / to advise Win-itOx^She may he ahout to sit, / advise. P. MSn-Ittlri simiis, M6n.IttirI sitis, M8n.Itari sint, "i We may he about to ) advise \ ye may he about to ) advise \ they m^y be about ) to advise. 4, pERFEcr Tense. We have advised. or we advised ye have advised, or ye advised they have advised, or tfiey advised We had advised ye had advised tliey had advised. Ve shall] , e will \ ««?« ley will r^^^^^' S. M8n-u6rim, J may j , M8n-ueris, thou maystl , * , M8n.ugrit, he may j"^^*« ''■ P. M8n-Ti8rimils, F(3 may] , M8n-ugritlE, ye may\ 5"?'% M8n.ugrii.t. theymcSj^^"^'^- 6. Past-Perfect Tense. 3. M8ii-uisBem^ MSn-uisses, HSn-msset, I might thou mightst he might M8n.tii88emil8, We might 1 ^ M8n-ui8setis, ye might \ | M8n-aissent, they might \ << 1 INFINITIVE MOOD. Imperp. l'(8n-ere, to advise. Perfect. MSn-uisse, |' (am, urn) es8e,\ to advise. \to have advised. Future. M8n-itftnim (to he ahout GERUND. Gen. MSn-en^, of advising Dat. M8n-endo, for advising Ace. MSn-endnm, the advising Ahl. MSn-endo, by advising. viae ye. SUPINES. M8n-ituni, to advise. \ U5n-Itli. to he advised. hall advise •■'- «■ "iiftjje. 01 et them aimse. PARTICIPLES. iMFERF. Mu/i-'ciia 'mis;, advising. Future. MSn-iturils (a, tufl;, about to adviie. JiliJ. u § 03. ESg^bam, K«g-«bit, TIIinD CONJUQATION-ACTIVE. j ,, THIRD CONJUOATION.-AoTivE Voic.. ^io, roxl, rectum, t6giri,~to ruU, INDICATIVE MOOD. v 1. PRESKNT Tkxse. 1 rule thou rulett he rules. P' Blg-Imfii, B«g-Itl«, Eig-unt, 2. Past-Imperfect Tense. WeruU ye rule they rule. I was ruling thou wast ruling he was ruling. I shall rule thou wili rule he will rule. 3. FuTUHE Tense SSIS**?' V'^^re ruling B«g-«baat, they were ruling. P. Blg^^gmiifl, IWg^tlo, IWg-ent, '^. Bez.1, BoxJatI, Eex-It, '?. Bdx^ram, Eex-graa, Bex^r&t, 'S'. Bex^ro, Bez^ris, Bez^rlt, 4. Perfect Texsk. We shall rule ye will rule they will rule. We have ruled, cr we ruled y^ have ruled, or he has ruieT," or I Eex^mr,* « - .t. ^/ *'"'^'^ he ruled. \ ^^"^^^^H^hey have ruled, or 5. Past-Perpect Tense. ti^ey ruled. I had ruled thou hadst ruled he had ruled. 6. Future-Perfect Tense. P. Eex^ramfig, We Jiad ruled Kex-dratis, ye had ruled Bex-erant, tkey had ruled. I shall have ruled fhou wilt have ruled he will have ruled. ^' Sji3^^'' ^' '^^^ have ruled Bex^ntia, ye will have ruUd Jtex^nnt, they wiU have ruled. S. BigJS, S. Elg-Ito, Beg4to, IMPERATIVE MOODk Present Tense. Bu^^thou. IP. B«g.It8, Future Tense. Thou shalt rule I P nstr rwtx heshallrule, or let i^^^'^^^' him rule. I B5g-unto, Buleye. Ye shall rule they shall rule, or 6ct uifsm rui6. 199. THIRD CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 45 e shall have ruled will have ruled y will have ruled. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. Prksent Tense. B2g-am, Big4it, RIg-Srem, BSg-^rfis, Beot-llriii sim, Seot-llrils sis, Beolrllriis sit, Bez-Srls, Rez<2rlt, Rez-issem, Bez-isses, Sez-isset, I may rule thou inai/st rule he may rule. P. B«g.aratts, B2g-&cls, Bdg.ant, We may rule, ye may i ule they may rule. 2. PAST-lMPEnFECT TkNSK. I might rule thou mightst rule he might rule. P. BXg-iTimVut, We might rule BSg-SretIs, ye might rule E8g-«rexit, they might rule. 3. Future Tense. T may be about to rule thoumaytt be about to rule he may be about to rule. P. Eect-flri simils rt \ We may be about to « / rule Eect-flrl \ ye may be about tc sitis, / rule Rect-Orl J they may be about tc Bint, / rule. 4. Perfect Tense. I may ) , thaumaystl^-; he may y ""'""'• P. Bez-lrimfis, We may] , Rez^ritis, ye maU^^'Z . Eez^rint, they may]"*^'^ 5. Past-Perfect Tense. I might 1 , thou mighfatl TS he might ('■"^«^' P. Eez-issSmtts, We might] , Eez-issStls, ye might]^^^, Eez-issent, they mighty ^^*"^ INFINITIVE MOOD. IMFERF. Bgg-SrS, to rule. I^erfect. Bez-issS, Future. Beot-tlram \to be about {to have ruled. Xto be ah (am, nm)essS,/ to rule. GERUND. Gen. BSg-endl, of ruling Dat. BSg-endo, for ruling Ace. B8g-endiun, tJie ruling Abl. B6g-endo, hy ruling. Bree-tom, to rule. SUPINES. I Beo-tfl, to he ruled. PARTICIPLES. iMPERr. Beg-ens (ntis), ruling. Future. Beo-turus (a, urn), about to rule. 8. Aud-io, Aud'is, Aud-it, S". And*iebam, Aad-iebas, Aud-ieb&t, S. And-iam, Aud-ies, Aud-iet, FOURTH CONJUGATION—ACTIVE. FOURTH CONJUGATION.-AcTiVE Voick. Audio, audiW, audltum, audirg,-fo Aear. §94. INDICATIVE MOOD. 1. PaESENT Tense. P. And-imiis, Aud-itis, I hear ihou hearest he hears. Aud-iunt, 2. Past-Imi'erfkct Tense. We hear ye hear they hear. I was hearing thouwast hearing he was hearing. Aud-iebatts, ye were hearinq Aud-iebant, they were hearing. 3. Future Tense. / shall hear thou wilt hear he will hear. And-iemiis, Aud-ietTs, And-ient, S. Aud-ivi, And-ivisH, Aud-Mt, I have heard, or / heard thou hast heard, or thou heardst he has heard, or he heard. 4. Perfect Tense. P. Aud-ivlmiis, Aud-ivistis, Aud-ivemnt 01- -ivere, S. Aud-IvSram, Aud-iv^ras, Aud-iverSt, S. AudoivSro, Aad>!vgris, Attd-iverit, 5. Past-Perfect Tense. We shall hear ye will hear they will hear. We have heard, or we heard ye have heard, or ye heard Vheyliave heard. / or they heard I had heard thou hadst heard he had heard. P. Aud-ivgramfis, We had heard Aud-iveratis, ye had heard Aud-iverant, they had heard. Future-Pehfect Tense. P- Aud-ivgrimfis, We slwll] , heard. Aud-iveritis, ye will /"^^^ Aud-iverint, they will J «eard, slmll 1 - thou wilt f,,™ will I 8. Aud-I, S. Aud-ito, And^ito IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Hear thou. \ p. Aud-itS, Future Tense. Bear ye. Thou shall hear he shall hear, or let him hear. P. Aud-itote, Aud-ionto, Ye slinJJ J,^,^,. ^ .. „. ,t, the;/ shall hear, OT let them liear. §94. FOURTH CONJUGATION — ACTIVE. 47 fli , We were hearing ye were hearing they were hearing. , We had heard ye had heard they had heard. .. „. ,t, ^hen shall hear, OT lei them liear. 8. And-iam, And-ias, Aud-iat, And-Irem, Aud-ires, Aud-iret, S. Aud-ItOriiB sim, Aad-itOriis sis, Aud-ittlrtls Bit, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. P. Aud-iam{i8, And'iatis, Aud-iant, I may hear thou mayst hear he may hear. 2. Past-Impeufect P J might hear thou mighlst hear he might hear. 3. Future Tense. P. ensf. Aad-iremiis, Aud-Iretis, Aud-irent, I may he about to hear thou mayst be about to hear he may be about to hear. Aud-Ituii simiis, Aud-ituri sitis, Aud-ituri sint, 4. Perfect Tense. We may hear ye may hear they may hear. We might hear ye might hear they might hear. We may be about to hear ye may be about to hear they may be about to hear. S. Aud-iv?rim, And-iveris, Aud-iverlt, I may 1 ^ r^ thad maystl § « '"' may \'^ M he P. Aud-iverimiis, Aud-iveritis, Aud-Iverint, 5. Past-Perfect Tense, S. Aud-Ivissem, Aud-\visses, Aud-ivisset, I might thou mightst he might And-ivissemus, Aud-ivissetis, Aud-ivisseut, We ye they We may ) « -^j may)'^^ might ye might >^ they might] J INFINITIVE MOOD. Imperp. Aud-irg, to hear. Perfect. Aud-ivissg, /^'l '^"^1 ' t heard. Future. Aud-iturmn (to he about (am, urn) esse, l to hear. GERUND. Gen. And-iendi, of hearing Dat. Aud-iendo, f(yr hearing Ace. Aud-iendnm, the hearing All. Aud-iendo, hy hearing. SUPINES. And-Itum, to hear. Aud-itfl, to be heard. ' PARTICIPLES. Imperf. Aud-iens Tntis), hearing. Future. Aud-iturus (a, um), about to hear. Obi. In all the Perfect Tenses v is frequently omitted before e and ». two t's are often contracted into i : as, The Rudlvistl becomes audiistT or audisti audlvistln audlvit audlveriint audlv#ram audlT^ro audiistis or audistis audilt audiei'unt audi^ram audiPro audlvgrim becomes audiSrim ( audiissem or audlvissem audlTissg audissem audiis.su vf audiss^. 48 FIKST CONJUGATION-PASSIVE. § 95. FIRST C0XJUGATI0N.-P.S8IVK Voice. Am&r, iimattiB sum or fU, SniW,-^ j, i^^ INDICATIVE MOOD. §95. S. f^-|'» I am loved Am-ariK or \ &m.arg, / ff^ou art laved Am-aWr, fte ig ^^red. 1. Present Tense. P. Am-amfir, Am-aminl, Am-antilr, / I was \ loved Am-abSr, Am-abarTs or| ihou'^wast being 6e/ngr Past-Imperfkct Texse heing We are loved ye are loved they are loved. ■m-abarys orj am-abarg, ] love'a Am-abatiir, / ^* '^"^ I loved. Am-abamiir, 1^^^ ^^ere being \ IovpA Am-abamini, loved (ye were \ loved being K lovea Am-abaatiir. I ^^V w'^^e beina ' I loved. ^ . 3. FuTimE Tj'xse Am-aberisory .,_ .. ^ , ] ^^''^^' We shall be loved am-sMre, f ^'^^^^^i^e^ovedl Am-aWmTtiT Am-abitfir ^ h. 11^ . ,1 aDimini, ye will be loved ^^ai aoitur, j he wdl be loved, f Am *!«,«««. .i ^ «. r Am-abmitiir, they will be loved. ^^ 4. Pe^ct Tense. 5.Am^atfis3uni|7^.,5,^^^^^^^^^ We been ) ortcosZoved or Mmfis, ^o^^cf. or were Am-atuB es ¥^^ ^»^ 6een or fuisti, f J^*"5<^» or wast . _ I «ofe(Z Am-aWs estUe hue been loved, or ftut, / or was loved. ' loved ^tL,?^'''(y'^''^'^eenloved, oTtuiatiB, \ or were roved A^att sunt, jth^ i^ive been /?, 5. Am-atQs gram) ,- , , , or fueram, / -^ '^"' "^^ loved Am-atfis grfisUAott hadst been orfoeras, / loved Past-Peupect Texsk. been P.Am.aGerainiis|Tre hid or meramiis, f Zoi;ei Am-atI gratis) Am-atfis'lr&t) '"'"'" I o^-fiieratis, p^^^dbeenhwl orftigrat, j^^^^adbeenloved. \ Am^H l^rmUthey had been I orfligrant, / loved. 6. Fdture-Perfect Tense. orfolnmfis, f 6ec„fo^ed ^f^Jl!:tU) ye tviU have been _ or faentis, f loved orfagrmt, / been loved. S. Am-atfis gro)Ifi^zaa«e6een or fnero, ( loved Am.mB JriBWiou wilt Jiave or_faer:s, ( been loved Am-atiis grit ) hp. Tni'n "C orfuerit, / loved.' ' OScH § 9i>' FiHST OONTUOATION — PASSIVE. 49 8. Am-are, iS'. Au-ator, Am-ator, IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Be thou loved. | P. Am-amini, Future Tense. Tliou shall be loved he shall be loved, or let him be loved. P. Am-antor, Jie ye loved. They shall be loved, or lei them be loved. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. . OJ* *»«« I advised. or fill, Mon-itiis es orfoistai. f advised MSn-ifi estis jv^^'^e been ad- or foist'S, j ^'**'^» or were M6n.iti sunt, Ithey have been ad- fiienint, or< vised, or were raere, | aduised. 5. Past-Perfect Tense. 5^. Mon-itiis eram/1 7tad 6ee» ad- or fueram, \ vised Mon-itiis eras (thou hadst been orfueras, \ advised Mon-itus erat (he had been od- or fuerat, \ vised. P. Mon-iti eramus/ We had been ad- orfaeramus, \ vised Mon-iti eratis (ye had been ad- or faerat!s, \ vised Mon-iti erant ( they had been ad- or fuerant, \ vised. S. Mon-itus ero (I shall have been or fuero, \ advised Mon-itiis eris (thou wilt have orfueris, \ been advised "*• jftt Ibril liiXCc: UCCn or fuerlt, \ advised. 6. Future-Perfect Tense. 1*. Mon-iti erimiis/IFe shall have or faerimiis, \ 6ee» advised Mon-iti gritis (ye will have been or fueritls, \ advised aon-iti erunt (they will have orfuerint, \ been advised. 96. SECOND CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 51 IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. 8. M5n-grg, Be thou advised. \ P. M5n>emlnl, Future Tense. S. MSn-etSr, Thou shall be advised P. M5n-eni5r, M5ii-etdr, he shall he advised, or let him he advised. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. Be ye advised. They shall he ad- vised, or let them he advised. 8. M6n^&r, {"^3 ^ '"^' MSn-eaxis or (thou mayst be mSn-eare, \ advised MSn^atiir, {^^ l^J ^^ °'^- p. M8n-eamiir, / ^* ^^y ^^ ^^• \ vised Mon-eamini. /^^ '^^V ^^ "* ' \ vised Mou-eantiir. i^^^V. "*?2/ ^e ad- vised. 2. Past-Imperfect Tense. S. M8n-erer, {^ ^d* ^^ "'^" M8n-ereris orUhou mightst be mon-erere, \ advised p. M8n.eremiir, / ^e mt^^f 6e ad- ' ( vised Mon-eremini. /^* V^^dM ie ad- ' \ vised M8n-erentiir. [^^yy^^yhtbead- ' I. vised. 3. Perfect Tense. 8. M8n-itils simf J may have been or fugrim, \ advised M8n-Itiis sis Uhou mayst have or faeris, | been advised M8n-itJis sit (he may have been or faerit, \ advised. P. M8n-!1a simiis r We may have or faerimus, \ been advised M8n-iti sitis hje may have been or faeritis, \ advised Mon-ifi sint Uhey may luxve or faerint, \ been advised. 4. Past-Perfect Tense. S. M8n-Itiis es8em( I might have been or faissem, \ advised M8ii-itiis esses i thou mightst have or fuisscs, ( been advised M8n-itu8 esset (he might luive or faisset, \ been advised. P. Mon-StS essemus i" We might have or ftdssemiis, \ beeii advised Mon-iti essetisjj/e might have or faissetis, \ been advised Mon-iti essent Uhey might have or fuissent, \ been advised INFINITIVE MOOD. Imperfect. M8n-eri, to he advised. Perfect. Mon-itum (am, um), essg or fuisse, to have been advised. Future. M8n-itum in, to he about to be advised. PARTICIPLES. Perfect. Moa-!tiis (a, um), advised or hav'ng been advmd. Gerundive. Mon-endiis (a, um), fit to be advised. D 2 52 THIUD CONJUGATION—PASSIVE. § 97. THIRD CONJCJGATION.- Passive Voice. »eg8r, reotiis sum or fvH, Tegl,~to be ruled. 5 97. Ileg-6r, Beg-eris reg-erg, Reg-itur, or INDICATIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. I am ruled p. Egg-imiSr, Uhou art ruled he is ruled. S. Reg-ebar, i^ Reg-imini, Reg-untar, 2. Past-Imperfect Tense. was being V ruled Keg-ebarls ovithon wast beinq reg-ebarS, ) ruled Reg-ebatiir. P''^ **'"* ^6% \ ruled. P. Reg-ebamiir, Reg-ebamini, Reg-ebantiir, S. Reg-ar, Reg-eris or rgg-erS, Reg-etiir, S. Rec-tus sum or fui, 3. Future Tense. I shall be ruled I P. Reg-emfir, thou wilt be ruled \ Reg-emini, he will be ruled. I Reg-enttlr, 4. Perfect Tense. 1 have been ruled, or was , ruled Rec-tiis es or!''*''" ^^ ^eew fuisti, i *'"^e(Z, or wast f ruled Reotas est or (he has been ruled, ™it» \ or was ruled. P. Recti sujniis or fi\imiis, Rec-ti estis or fuistis, Reo-ti sunt, fuerunt, or fuere, We are ruled ye are ruled they are ruled. ( We were being \ ruled (ye were being \ ruled ithey were being \ ruled. We shall be ruled ye will be ruled they will be ruled. iWe Jiave been ruled, or were ruled (ye Jiave been j ruled, or were I ruled ithey have been ruled, or were I ruled. 5. Past-Pekfect Tense. OT fueram.°^k ^^ &ee» ruled I ^- Kw-fi eramusf We had been Rec-tus^ eras (thou hadsi been ReJ.fi S'i/"^f ^ . orfueras, 1 ruled -"^"^ .®l*^8 ( 2/e had been 6. Future-Perfect Tense. /7«/.aZZ>.,6ee»/P. Rec-G«rlmiis/Fe shall have or fQerimiis,! been ruled Rec-ti eritis iye will have been or fuentis, ) ruled Rec-la erunt (fhfMi «..m i orfuennt, \ been ruled. S. Rec-tus ero i or fuero, ( ruled Rec-tus^ eris (thou wilt have or fueris, \ been ruled Rec-tfis^ erit (he will Jiave been or fucnt, \ ruled. 7. i 5)97. THIRD CONJUGATION — PASSIVE. 58 We shall be ruled ye will be ruled ihey will be ruled. S. Egg-gr8, o'. Egg-xt5r, Beg-!tor, IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Be thou ruled. | P. Eeg-imlni, Future Tense. Thou shall be ruled P. Reg-unt8r, he shall be ruled, or let him be ruled. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Be ye ruled. They shall be ruled, or lei them be rided. S. Rgg-&r, I may be ruled Eeg-aris or Yhou mayst be reg-are, / ruled Elg-atiir, he may be ruled. We may be rtded ye may be ruled they may be ruled. S. E§g-8rgr, I might be ruled Eeg-ereris or Uhou mightst be reg-erere, / ruled Egg-erettir, he might be ruled. 1. Present Tense. P. Egg-amiir, Eeg-amini, Eeg-antiir, 2. Past-Impeufect Tense. P. Eeg-gremiir, We might be ruled Egg-greminl, ye might he ruled Egg-grentiir, theymightberided. 3. Perfect Tense. S. Eec-tiis sim or fuerim, Eec-tiis sis or fueris, \Imay have been ) ruled \lhou mayst have I been ruled Eec-tiis sit or\ fee may have been fugrit, / ruled. P. Eec-ti simus \We may have or fugrimiisj been ruled Eec-ti sitis or ]ye may have been faeritis, / ruled Eec-ti sint or) they may have faerint, / been ruled. 4. Past-Perfect Tense. Eec-tHs essem or fuissem, Eec-tiis esses or fuisses, Eec-tiis esset or fuisset, II might have ) been ruled Hhou mightst have I been ruled ]li,e might have ) been ruled. . Eec-ti essemiisnre might have or fuissemus, ) been ruled Eec-ti essetis \ye might have or faissetis, I been ruled Eec-ti essent \they might have or fuissent, / been rided. INFINITIVE MOOD. Imperfect. Egg-i, to be ruled. Perfect. Eec-tum (am, urn) esse or foissg, to have been ruled. Future, Eec-tum in, to be about to be ruled. PARTICIPLES. Gebundive. Eeg-flndus (a, um), ruled or having been ruhsd^ fit to be ruled. 54 FOURTH CONJUGATION— PASSIVE. §!i8. FOURTH CONJUGATION.-Passive Voice. AudI8r, audltus sum or M, ^udM,~to he heard. §98. S. Aud-i8», Aud-irls or and-Ir8, Aud-Itiir, INDICATIVE MOOD. 1. Present Tense. I am heard I P. Aud-Imfir, jthou art heard Audlmini, he is heard. | Aud-Iuntur, 2. Past-Imperfect Tense. We are heard ye are heard they are heard. S. Aud-iebSr, (^ "'"s hetng . I heard And-ieh^U or (thou wast helnq aud-iebarS, \ heard Aud-iebatttr, i^^ ^«« ''«% t heard. 3. Future Tense. Aud-ierig or /it, he takes. ^r^- ^^' is/£f ""^ Cap-itis, ye take Cap-iunt, they take, aud-iebam. Subjunctive Mood, Imperative Mood. J;ap-ito, » ^i/cm ■ C&p-8rls '\thou art H or -8rS, j ^a/cm C8,p-Imiir, C&p-Imlnl, We are taken ye are taken nqq.) ■ C&p-Ittir, 7t6 is taken. C8,p iunttlr, they are taken tggo, / covtir. tiiigo, I dye. ^m Past-Imperf. C&p-iSb&r, / was being taken, H Future. Cap-i&r, I shall be taken. like and icb&r. aud-iar. ngular Imperative H Subjunctive Moou. B8.) Jo, I fortify. io, / nourish. 0. I punish. H Present. C&p-i&r, . I may be taken, ■ Past-Imperf. CSjgngfgr, I might be taken, H Impebative Mood. H Present. C&p-grg, be thou taken, H Ftttwre. C&p-it8r, thou shalt be taken, H C&p-iantor, they shall be taken, H Infinitive Mood. like like aud-iar. reg-ergr. rgg-erg. rgg-Itor. aud-iuntor IE FOURTH. S Imperfect. C&p-I, __J_Jear. VCr-ens, feariim. VCr-Ituras, about to fear. ver-jtQs, having feared. Vgr-endas. fit to be feared. I endeavour. I console. I wonder. I behold, I deserve, I promise. i^eponents are the only Latin Verbs fh.>* ».„ Jit to be exhnrf^^ . x.i--... '-"''t f^er have a passive meaninn,. „„ J'.7 /.^^ HApi^ER XVI ■ Deponent Veuijh. 59 liko ani5r. mdaedr. II. / Jear, jthou fearest, etc. / w:,} fearing, I shall fear. I have /eared, or I /eared. I had /eared. I shell /lave /eared. ) I I I may /ear. lmi(jht/var. \I may he about ) to /ear. I may have /eared. XI might have ) /eared. } Fear thou, thou shall /ear. to /ear. 'to have /eared. to be about to /ear. /earing, about to /ear. having /eared. /it to be /eared. to /ear. to be /eared. o//earing. I behold, I deserve, I promise. no Active Parti- le with an active I verbs), are the •• as, hortandOs, Verbs used in omplexus, con* III. Ldqu5r, IfioHttls sum, I5qaT, IV. Parti8r, partltiii •um, portlrl. to speak, liko r?g?T. to divide, „ andiSr. I'resent. Past-Imp. Future. I'er/ect. Pasl'Perf. Fut.-Per/ III. L«5qnflr, LOqu-Crls, (CrC^ &c. Lflqu-ebar, L6qu-ftr, LOcu-tQs sura, LOcu-tfls 6rara, Lflcu-ttts Cro, I speak. \thou speakest, I was speaking. I shall speak. I have spoken, or I spoke, >I had spoken. 1/ shall luive I spoken. } Present. Past-Imp. Future. Per/ect. Past-Per/. L6qu-ar, LOqu-CrCr, L6cu-turfl8 sim, LQcu-tlis sim, Ldcu-ttls essom, I may speak. I v^ight speak. \I may be about I to speak. \I may have I spoken. \I might have I spoken. Present, Future. L6qu-CrS, L5qu-It0r, Speak thou. \thou shall { speak. Imper/. Perfect. Future. LSqu-i, L6cii-tum esse, LOcii-tQrum essC, to speak. to have spoken. to he about to speak. hnperf. Future. Perfect. Gerundive. L6qu-en3, LOcu-tOrrts LOcu-ttts, LSqu-endils, speaking, about to speak, having spoken. fit to be spoken. Supines. L3cu-tiim, LOcu-tu, Gerund. Lfiqu-endi, to speak, to be spoken. 0/ speaking. PartiOr, Pnrt-lrls (Irfii, &c. Part-iobar, Part-iar, Part-itQs sum, Part-It (Is Crnm, Pnrt-itOs 6ro, IV. I divide. >thou dividest, &c. I was dividing. I shall divide. \ I have divided, I OT I divided. >I had divided. \I shall have di- ) vided. 'A > Part-iftr, Part-irCr, Part-iturfis sim, Part-ittts sim, Part-itQs esacm, I may divide. I might divide. ^ may he about [ to divide. I may have di- vided. I mifiht have divided. n iS Part-irC, Piirt-it(jr, Divide thou. {thou shall di- vide. Part-Irl, to divide. . \ y Part-itum ). , t -j 1 \ "^ es8(5 Hohavedivmed.J v, Part-iturumUo he about to I ^ essS, / divide. ) a Part-lens, dividing. Part-iturfts, about to divide. Part-ittts, having divided. Part-iendtts.^^ to be divided. i Part-itum, Part-itu, Part-iendi, to divide, to be divided. 0/ dividing. III. Fru8r, fruIttLs sum, Fung5r, functus sum, LabSr, lapsiis sum, Examples for Conjugation. / enjoy, r perform. I slip. IV. Blan.IiSr, Largior, Menti5r, I flatter. I give money. I lie. mentus, confessus, detestatus, gmentltus, expertus, exsecrutns, m?d"15tus, mensus, mSd^ratus, ftplnatus, pactus, partTtus, testatus, ultus. See §§ 169-1 72. 06a. 2. Intransitive Deponents have no Supine in « and no Gerundive. Ohs. 3. The four following Verbs have a Passive form with an Active nietining in the Perfect Tenses only, and are therefore called Semi-Deponents, c,\ Neuter-Passivea : Sfileo, solitiis siim, sblcrg, to he accustomed, i Gaudeo, gavlstts sum, gaudoi§, to rejoice. Andco, ausils sum, auier?, to dare. \ Fido, flstts sum, fIdPr?, to trmt^_^^ 60 PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. §102. Chapter XVII.— Periphrastic Conjugation. § 102. I. The Active Periphkastic Conjugation consists ot the Future Participle in turns with the Verb sum, and expresses intention or futurity. Present. Fast-Iviperf. Future. Perfect. Past-Perfect. Present. Past-Imperf. Perfect. Past-Perfect, Imperfect, Perfect. IXniCATIVE MOOD. Amaturus sum, Amaturus eram, Amaturiis ero, Amaturus fui, Amaturus fueram, SUBJUXCTIVE Amaturus sim, Amaturus essem, Amaturus fuerim, Amaturus fuissem, INFIXITIVE Amaturom esse, Amaturom fuisse, / am about to love. I was about to love. I sliall be about to love. I have been or was about to love. I had been about to love. MOOD. I inai/ be about to love. I might be about to love. I may have been about to love. I might have been about to lave. MOOD. to be about to love. to have been about to love. .-u'^i. The Passive Periphrastic Conjugation consists of the Grerundive with the Verb sum, and expresses that which IS to be, should be, or ought to be done. Present. Past-Imperf. Future. Perfect. Past-Perfect. Present. Past-Imperf. Perfect. Past-Perfect. Imperfect. Perfect. INDICATIVE MOOD. Amandils sum, Amandiis eram, Amandus ero, Amandiis fuT, Amandus fueram, SUBJUNCTIVE Amandiis sim, Amandiis essem, Amandiis fuerim, Amandus fuissem, I am to be loved. I iciis to be loved. I shall be to be loved. I have been or loas to be loved. I had been to be loved. MOOD. I may be to be loved. I might be to be loved. I may have been to be loved. I might have been to be loved. INFINITIVE MOOD. Amandum esse, to befit to be loved. Amandum fuisse, to liave been fit to be loved. K !"^ passive conjugation occurs only in transitive verbs. In other verbs the irapersonal form is used, and the agent is represented by the mtive : as, mthi eundum est, I mttst go; obllviscendum tibi injuriurum esse censeo, lam of opinion that you ought to forget your wrongs. 06s. 2. The translations above given are intended rather to represent the uicumnif ol uic scpaiule words than the ordinary sii?nilication of the com. binations, which will be fully explained in the Syntax. . § 105. STEMS OF VERBS. 61 JGATION. Chapter XVIII. — Stems of Verbs, Formation of Tenses, and Peculiar Forms. § 103. Stems.— The Stems of Verbs of the First Conjuga- tion end in a : as, ama, love. The Stems of Verbs of the Second Conjugation end in e: as, mone, advise. The Stems of Verbs of the Third Conjugation end in a consonant or u : as, reg, rule ; minu, lessen. ' The Stems of Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation end in it as, audi, hear. § 104. Uncoxtracted and Contracted Verbs. — In the Third Conjugation the Terminations of the Persons and of the Tenses are affixed without any change in the Stem ; but in the First, Second, and Fourth Conjugations the Vowel of the Stem is frequently contracted with the Vowels of the Terminations. Hence the Third Conjugation is Uncontractedj the First, Second, and "'^'^ mrth Conjugations are Contracted. This will be seen from the Present Indi- cative Active. Ill Conjugation. Sing. 1. rSg-o minu-o 2. r6g-ls minu-ls 3. rSg-lt mlnu-lt Plur. 1. rSg-lmus minu-lfmOs 2. rgg-ltls mlnu-ltls 3. r8g-uut mlnu-unt I Conjugation. II Conjugation. IV Conjugation. Sing. I. a,ina-o =3,mo m5ne-o audi-o 2. a,ina-is =iimas m8iic-is =m8nes audi-ls = audis 3. ama-tt =amat niQne-lt = mQngt audi-it = audit Plur. 1. a,ina-tmtis = 3,inamtis mone-lm&s = mGnemfis audi-lmtls = audimtls 2. ama-ltls =amatls mSne-itls = mSnetls audi-ltis = auditls 3. S,ma-unt =iiiuant • mSne-unt =mQneiit audi-unt § 105. Personal Terminations. — The Personal Tei-mi- nations are the personal pronouns more or less coriiipted. The regular terminations in the Active Voice are in their The regular terminations in the Active Voice are in their simplest form : Sing. Plur. Sing. 1. -m -inu3 as in r5gc-ba-m 2. -s -tis „ iegeba-8 S. -t -nt „ rfigeba-t Plur. icgeba-mas rggeba-tis regeba-ut. «2 i FORMATION OP TENSES. §106. Or with a vowel prefixed ; Sing. Plur. Sing. o-(m) I-mtis as in rSg-o ,1 rgg-i-s ., rgg-I-t 1. 2. 3. I-s I-t I-tls u-nt Plur. rSg-I-mfls rSg-I-tls r6g-u-nt. § 106. FoRMATioiT OF THE IMPERFECT Tenses.— 1 Present lenses.— The Indicative and Imperative are formed bv addino- the personal terminations to the stem without any tens! suffix. In the Imperative the s, the termination of the ^^^/l^^^P^,-^^ dropped, and e alone remains: as rea:-e reg-.te : in the contracted conjugations, ama = ama-e' • ming = mone-e ; audi = audi-e. The Subjunctive has the tense suffix -a: as ree:-a-m mone-a-m, audi-a-m. In the 1st conjugation the a of the stem IS contracted with the a of the tense suffix into e • as 5ma-a-m = ame-m. The Infinitive has the tense suffix ere': as, reg-ere : m the contracted conjugations, ama-re = T^'f^^' ,^o^e^re = mone-ere; audi-re = audi-ere. The Participle h^^ the suffix -ens (stem -ent) : as, reg-ens, audi- ens : m the 1st and 2nd conjugations, ama-ns = ama-ens • mone-ns = jnone-ens. ' Obs. The ( of the Imperative is dropped in die, speak, from dico: dQc lead from duoo ; fac, make, from facio; fSr, hring, from fCro ' ' 2. P_ast-hxperfect Tenses. — TlciQ Indicative has the tense suffix eba: as, reg-eba-m, audi-eba-m ; in the 1st and 2nd ^^rS T^' ama-ba-m = ama-eba-m; mone-ba-m = mone- -BDa-m. Ihe Subjunctive has the tense suffix gre: as rea;- ere-m: m the contracted conjugations ama-re-m ='ama- ere-m ; mone-re-m = mone-ere-m ; audi-re-m = audi-ere-m. S. Future Tenses.-Th^ Indicative has the tense suffix I TJX ^^""^ 2nd conjugations : as, Sma-b-o; mone-b-o: and the tense suffix a or e in the 3rd and 4th conjuga- tions, a being used m the first person, and e in all the other persons: as, reg^a-m, reg-e-s, rec:-e-t, &c. ; audi-a-m, audi-e-s, audi-e-t, &c. § 107. Formation of the Perfect Tenses. The Perfect lenses are formed: ruh^I '"'^'l"'?^*? *¥ Stem; as. ama Camo\ ama-v-i: audi (audio) audi-v-i This is the regular way of form ng the Perfects ofthe First and Fourth Conjugations. o tne x-criects 2. By adding u to the Stem ^■ as, mong (moneo), mon-u-i. The § 108. FORMATION OF TENiSES. 63 ima-e; mone llco; dac, lead. final vowel of the Stem ia dro'iped. This is the regixlar way of forming the Perfects of the Seuond Conjugation. Oha. 1. The terminations v and u are the same, and are derived from fu-i, the Perfect of the verb to he. 2. Some verbs drop the sign of the Perfect ; this is especially the case with Stems ending in m or »; as, mlnu-o, mtnu-I, lessen; volv-o, volv-l, roll; vert-o, vert-I, ttirn. 3. By adding s to the Stem : as, rgg (rggS), rexi=reg-s-I. Oh». The Euphonic changes of letters must be noted. (i) C8, gs, qus, hs are contracted into x : as, duco, duxi, lead ; c6quo, coxi, cook; triho, traxi, drag, (ii) 6 is changed into p before s : as, scribe, scripsi, write ; nQbo, nupsi, marry (of women). (iii) < and dare dropped before s; as, mitto, misl, send; laedo, laesl, injure. 4. By reduplication : as, tend (tendo), tS-tendi, stretch. cad (cado), cg-cldi, fall. morde (mordeo), m6-mordi, hite. 5. By lengthening the vowel of the Stem : as, jac or jaci O^cio), jeci, throw. v6ni (vgnio), veiii, come. m6ve (moveo), muvi, move. Oba. In compound Verbs the Reduplication is usually omitted : as, tundo, ttttttdl, beat, but contundo, contQdT, heat small, bruise; pello, pgptlll, drive, but c-mpello, compttll, drive together. 1. Present-Perfect or Aor^st Tenses.— Th.Q Indicative has the t nse suffix is ; 2nd pers. amav-is-tl, amav-i&-tis ; 3rd pers. amav-er-unt ; the s disappears in the other persons. The Subjunctive has the tense suffix eri: as, amav-eri-m. The Infinitive has the tense suffix isse : as, amav-isse. 2. Past-Perfect Tenses. — The /nr&a^we has the tense suffix era: as, amav-era-m. The Subjunctive has the tense suffix Isse: as, amav-isse-m. 3. The FuturerPerfect Tensehas the suffix gr: as, amav-er-o. § 108. The Supine is formed by adding turn and tu to the Stem : as, I. Ama-tiim, ama-tfi. j ITI. Rec-tum, rec-tu. II. MCnI-tum, mSnI-tu. | IV. Audi-tum, audi-tu. Obs. 1. In the Second Conjugation the e of the Stem is changed into t. Obs. 2. The Euphonic changes of letters must be noted : (i) g, qu, h become c before t : as, r^go, rectum ; c6quo, coctum ; tr^ho, tractum. (ii) b becomes j7 before t: as, scrlbo, scriptura ; nubo, nuptum. (Hi) d and t are dropped before the t of the Supine, which in these cases becomes s : as, laedo, laesum, itiiure : claudo, clansum, shut. In some cases, but rarely, the d or t ot the Stem also l^ecomes s ; as, ccdo, ces-sum, yield ; mitto, mis-sum, send. 64 FORMATION OF TENSES. §109 iJilstem 7^1 ^^'''''"' ^''"'^^^' ^' formed by adding turHs tc ama-turus; mSnI-turtts ; rec-turils; audi-tfiras tracturiis, ecriptQrtts, laesOrtts. ^^t- ^' i° V^^ ^^'■^' *^® ^"P^°^« «f ^liich vai-y from the regular forma tion. the Future Participles do not adopt the«e variations :aa, irt^« / •«'^'"^ -Swptwe. jv*^. Pari!. § 110. Eemarks upon certain Forms. =iJ,*® suffix erwn^ in the Perfect Indicative Active is frpQuenflv shortened by the poets : as. dedgrunt. they gave. The suffix Ire Ztid 2. The Gerund and Gerundive in the Third and Fourth rnninoo+,-^«= leStr ' °' ^'•' P«*^"^d"^ fro^ P^itior. ohtamp2 in Wr S Jn'- ' '^•'"^'!^ a Participle, or Participial Adjective. teaavklTnf Z /f «°f ^? s'g^^^fication : as. laetabuSdus. rejoici^ greatly, jull of joy -, lacrlmabundus. weepinq m-ofuselv • fflrrhiinrlnw full of rage ; mOribundus. in the very article of d^cdh ' *"'^''''°'^"«' § 111. Ancient Iorms. imlohennwdhng; maLmfrom malo. he moretcilling. A so^d^m Sstead of Mam from 6do. eat; and duim from do, give, and its Sounds particularly m prayers and execrations: as,didvdntmav^h^aods grant: di te perdumt, may the gods destroy thee. ^ ^ ann- '^I'f ^'^^''If-P^Mt Indicative and the Perfect Submnctive Iiad ancient terminations in so and sim, the terminations beinrSlnaUv ««o and esim, instead of ero and erim: hence the fon^ ev2 faxo fa^im, are contractions of l6vav6so, f^c6so, ftlcCsim. In Srmaniu ; §112. lEREGULAR VERBS. 65 ing turUs tc iiture Participle regular forma- in the First I frequently I ere instead t and later we was ler : Chapter XIX.— Irregular Verbs. § 112. Irregular Verbs are such as are not conjugated according to the common Rules. The Conjugation of one Irregular Verb, sum, has been already given (§ 90). The rest are here given : I. Possum, pStui, possg,— to be able. P. 8. P. S. P. Indicative. Subjunctive. 1 [ndicative. Subjunctive. 1. Present. 4. Perfect. Pos-som Pos-sim -S'. PSt-ui Pot-uerim Pot-es Pos-sis Pot-uisti Pot-uer!s Pot-est Pos-sit Pot-uit Pot-uerit Pos-siimiis Pos-simiis P. P6t-uimiis Pot-uerimiis Pot-estis Pos-sltis Pot-uistis Pot-ueritia Pos-sunt Pos-sint Pot-uerunt (ere) Pot-uerint 1 2. Past -Imperfect. 5. Past- Perfect. Pot-eram Pos-sem s. Pot-ueram Pot-uissem Pot-eras Fos-ses Pot-ueras Pot-uisses Pot-eret Pos-aet P8t-uerat Pot-uiaset Pot-eramiis Pos-semiis p. Pot-ueramus Pot-uissemiis Pot-eratis Pos-setis Pot-ueratis Pot-uissetis Pot-erant Pos-seut Pot-uerant Pot-uiflsent 3. Future. 6. Future -Perfect. Pot-ero Pot-eris (wanting.) s. Pot-uero Pot-ueris (wanting.) Pot-erit Pot-uerit Pot-erimfis p. Pot-uerimiis Pot-eritis Pot-ueritis Pot-erunt Pot-uerint Infini TIV] 3. Imperfect — Possg. Perfect—] ?otuisse. Future — wanting. The Imperative, Gsnmd, and Supine are wanting The Imperfect Participle potens is used only as an Adjective, powerful. — - -- 1 — 1 — '■ \l -J ,.:.,.. ..,,., pos-sum is a contraction of pSt-aum ; pos-sim of pSt-sim ; pos-sem of pot-essem,; pSt-uI of pot-ful ; and pos-sfi of pot-esse. 66 § 113. IRREGULAR VERBS. n. V51o, vSluI, vem, -. tohemlling. HI. N51o, n5li^, nollg, — to be unwilling. IV. Maio, mSlui, mallg, _ to be more willing. Indicative. §iiaii S. V81o Vi8 Vult p. VSliimiiB Vultls V51imt S. V51-Sbam V81-eba8 V81-eb&t P. V81-ebamii8 V81-ebatl8 V51-ebant S. Vol-am V81-e8 V81-et P. V81-emii8 V81-etl8 V81-ent S. V81-tii V81-uisti ' V81-uit P. V81-uimtis V81-ui8tis V81-uenmt or -uerS S. V81-ulram V81-uera8 V81-uerat P. V81-aeramii8 V81-uerati8 V81-uerant 8. V81-ugro Vgl-ueris V81-uerit P. Vol-neriin&8 V81-ueritis vdi-nemt 1. Present. Nolo Non vi8 Non vult Nolumiis Non viiltl8 Ndlnnt 2. Past-Imperfect. N51-ebam Nol-ebas Nol-ebEt Nol-ebamiis Nol-ebatis Nol-ebant 3. Future. N51-am N5l-es N61-gt N51-emiis Kol-eti8 Ndl-ent 4. Perfect. Nol-nl Ndl-TU8ti Nol-uit Ndl-n!mii8 Nol-mstits Nol-ueront or -aerS 5. Past-Perfect. Kol-ueram Nol-uera4S Ndl-uer&t N51-n8r&iiiii8 Ndl-aerati8 Nol-uerant 6. Future-Perfect. Nol-uero NSl-uerfs Nol-uerit Ndl-uerimiis Nol-ueritis Nol-nerint Malo ^B Mavis ■ Mavolt 1 M&liimii8 1 Mavnltl8 H Malunt 1 Mal-ebam 1 1 Mal-eba8- H Mal-eb&t H Mal-ebamfig H Mal-ebat!8 H Mal-ebant 1 ITal-am 1 ^ Mal-e8 fl HU-et fl Mal-emtis ■ Hal-etis 1 Mal-ent ^ Mal-ni P Mal-uisfi Mal-uit Mal-uimiis Mal-uisti8 Mal-uerunt or -xiTr^Q Mai-ueram Mal-ueras , Mal-uerat ' Mai-ueramiis Mal-ugratl8 Mal-nerant Mal-uero Mal-aer!s MaJ-uerit Mas uaimiis M?^ Mal-ngrint §119^ 5113. IRREGULAR VERBS. 67 9- 'ling. S. afia is It S. P. s. p. s. It or 'U^Q V81-im Vgl-is Vellt Vel-imtls Vel-itis Vel-int Vel-lem Vel-les Vel-let Vel-lemiis Vel-letis Vel-lent VSl-uerim Vol-ueris V61-uerit YSl-nerimiig Vol-ueritis V81-ueriiit V51-tiissem Vol-tiisses Vol-uisset Vdl-nissemus Vol-nissetis Vdl-tussent (wanting.) liis [s t Subjunctive. 1. Present. Nol-im Nol-is Nol-it N51-Imtl8 N51-itls Nol-int 2. Paat-Imperfect. Nol-lem Nol-les Nol-lgt Nol-lemiig Nol-letis Nol-lent 3. Perfect. Nol-uerim Nol-ueris Nol-ueirit N51-uerimus Nol-ueritis Nol-uerint 4. Past-Perfect. N51-aissem N51-aisBes Nol-nisset Nol-uissemds N51-Tiisset!s Nol-uissent Imperative. Present. Nol-i Nol-itS Future. Nol-Ito Nol-ito N61-itot5 Nol-unto MU-im H&l-is Mal-It MSI-imiis HU-itis M»-int Mal-lem Mal-lSs Mal-let Mal-lemtU Mal-let!ts Ual-lent Mal-nSrim Mal-ueris Mal-uerit Mal-uerimiis Mal-uerit!s Mal-uerint Mal-uissem Mal-nisses lilal-uisset Mal-nissemiis Mal-uissetis Mal-uissent (wanting.) V«l-lg Vol-uisso Infinitive. Imperfect. NoMg Perfect. Nol-uissg Mal-lS Mal-oisse 68 s. s. Vdlens IRREGULAR VERBS. Impebfect Participle Nolens §!U (wanting.) ""li. a^Vfilo'. ""'"""•"^ °' "^' '"''' ''"^ ^«^° ' -^- 0^ -«^ (ma^s).. tractions ofV^CreTne lem *^°^^''l-''''"' nol-lem, mal-lem, are con- veWre. noWrl. S-We ' "''^-^""^5 '^'^'1 vel.lc% nol-lS, mal-ie, of Oft,. 3. SI vis, i/yoei «,i?/. ^/-yoM ;,/,„,,, is sometimes contracted into sis. § 114. V. Fgro, tiili, ferrg, lltom,~to bear. I. ACTIVE VOICE. S. Indicative. Subjunctive. I. Present. Fgr-o Fer-s Fer-t Fer-imfis Fer-tis Fer-unt Fgr-am Fer-as Per-at ' Fer-amiis Fer-atis Fer-ant 2. Past-Imperfect. Fer-ebam Fer-ebas Flr-eb&t Fer-ebamfis Fer-ebatis F6r-ebant Fer-rem Fer-res Fer-ret Fer-remiis Fer-retis Fer-rent 8. Fer-am Fer-es Fer-et Fer-emiifl Fer-etis Fer-ent Future. Laturiis sim Laturtis sis Laturiis sit, Latti]^ slmtis Latai5 sitis Latui^ sint Imperative. Present. Fer Fer-te Future. Fer-to Fer-to Fer-totg Fer-unto Infinitive. Imperfect. Fer-re Perfect. Tiil-isse Future. latuium esse -s-. P. s. p. s. Indicative. Subjunctive. 4. Perfect. Tiil-i TiU-grim Tul-isti TGl-eris Tfil-It Tiil^grit TiU-Imiis Tul-grimiis Tfil-istis Tiil-eritJs Tul-erunt or erg Tul-erint 5, Past-Perfect. Tiil-eram Tiil-eras TiU-erSt TiU-gramiis Till-gratis liil-grant TM'issem TiiMsses Tiil^issgt TiU'-issemiis Tiil-issetis liil-issent 6. Future-Perfect. TiU-gro TiU-grls TiU-grit TiU-grimiis TiU-eritis Tiil-erint (wanting.) Imperfect. Future. Participles. Fgrens Lat&rils {Ik, nm; Supines. Latum Lata Gen. Gerund. Fer-endi &c. \ 51 !<.4 of miig (magris). lilate, ther oftho maUlere, are con- nol-15, mal-ie, of tracted into sis. vr. Subjunctive. Tttl-grim TiU-eris Tiil^erit Tul-«rimiis TiU-eritis Tul-grint 'feet. TM'issem liiMsses rtU'-issemiis riil-isset!s rtU-iBsent rfect. wanting.) S. s. Indicative. SUIUUNCTIVE 1. Present. Fer-or Fer-&r Fer-rls Fer-arls Fer-tur Fer-atiir Fer-imur Fer-amtir Fer-imtni Fer-amim Fer-untiir Fgr-antar 2. Past-Imiierfect. Fer-abar Fer-rer ier-ebaris Fer-reris Fer-ebatur Fer-retiir Fer-ebamur Fer-remur Fer-ebamini Fer-remini Fer-ebantiir Fer-rentiir 3. Future. Fer&r (wanting.) Fer-eris Fer-etur Fer-emiir Fer-emini Fer-entur Impeu \TIVE. Present. Fer-re Fer-imini Future. Fer-tor Fer-tor Fer-untor II. PASSIVE VOICE. Indicative. OUBJUNCTIVE. 4. Perfect, S. P. s. LatiiB sum Latiis es latiis est LatI s&mus Latl estis LatI sunt Latiis sim Latiii Obs. 2. The Passive is used impersonally. Indic. : Ittlr, Ibatiir, Ibftflr Ituni c- ', &c. SUBJ. : eatfir, Iretttr, Ktum sit, &c. ' Obs. 3. 'J ,e compounds of eo usuaUy take ii, rarely ivi, in the Perfect Tenses • m^^'. 1?' ^ "PP''"'"'^^ make« fidu, ttdidram, Sdiissem, &c. Obs. 4 The compounds of eo, which have a transitive meaning, are conju- gated throughout in the Passive: as, Meo, 1 approach: Pass • Sr SdMs, aditur, adimttr, ildlmlnl, Sdeuntfir, &c. ' * ^^'' Obs. 5. Ambio, I go about, retains the i throughout and is conjugated re- gularly like a verb of the Fourth Conjugation. Hence we find ambiebam. Th« "^^^-^^f^f^f"^^" (Ov. Met. V. SGI), the Gerund ambiendi, &c. 72 IKBEOULAIt VEllliS. §119 §117. Vni. Queo, quivl, quire, qxatvLm,~to he nhle. §118, IX. Ngqueo, noqaivi, nlquii'g, u«quitum,-/ofceuHa6/*. Thene Verb.s aro conjiifratod exactly like 6o, but are detective in nome forms. Jn the Present Indicative non qui., non quit are ueed instead of ueqiiiN, nequit. § 119. X. — Neuter Passives. A. TJireo Neuter Verbs— Flo, to become, or he made, v&pulo, to he «fnSi r"*°i t^ *''^'^' ttro P.iHsivo in tJieir mjnification und con- Btruction, and uro lieuce called Neuter-Passives. 1. Flo, facttts sum, fiM,—to become or be made. iNDicATivK. Subjunctive. 1. Present. S. FI-o Fi-s Fit or fl-t S. S. [Fi-miis] [Fi-tis] Fi-unt Flam Fl-as Fi-&t Fi-amiis Fi-atis Fl-ant 2. Past-Imperfect. FI ebam Fi-ebas Fi-§bat Fi-ebamiis Fi-ebatis Fi-§bant Fl-grem Fl-eres Fl-grgt FI-2remiis Fl-gretis Fl-erent 3. Future. Flam Hes Fi-gt Fi-emiis Fi-ent (wanting.) Indicative. SunJUNcnvE. 4. Perfect. S. S. s. p. Factiis sum Factus Is Factus est Fact! siimils Fact! estis Fact! sunt Facttls sim Factus SIS Factus sit Fact! simiis Fact! sitis FactI sint 5. Past-Perfect. Factus gram Factiis gras Factiis er&t Fact! gramiis Facta gratis Fact! grant Factiis essem Factus esses Factiis essgt Fact! essemiig FactI essetis Fact! essent 6. Future-Perfect. Factiis gro Facttis gris Factiis grit Fact! grimiis Fact! gritis FactI grunt (wanting.) 11 I ^ I 1 Present. Imperfect. Perfect. Future. Imperative. K, fits Infinitive. Fl-gri Factum (am, nm) essg Factum Iri Participles, Perfect. Factiis (a, urn) Gerundive. Faciendiis (a, urn) Obs. 1, Flo is used as the Passive of facio, Ohs. 2. The fin fto is always long, except in fit and when not foUowed byr, Tne forms flmas und ntis are doubtful. S120. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 73 t followed byr. 2. Vftpaio, vipttiavi, to ht beaten, is conjugated regularly, and is used 3. VJneo, venlvi, vgnitmn {or vfinmn), to he $old, in a conmountl of tho supmc venum and tho vorb eo, and is used as the passive of Vondo. B F(jur otlier Verbs are also called Neuter-Passivee, because their Perfect fensos are Passive m fwm. They are likewise called Semi- deponents, because their Perfect Teuses are Depouentu. Audeo, atuos sum, audSre, to dare, venture. Fido, fiBus sum, f idgre, to trust. Gaudeo, gftvisus sum, gaudSre, to rejoice. S81eo, 861Itu» sum, sfilere, to be accustomed. Obt. The four following verbs use also the Perfect Participle Passive in an active sense : jQro, jQratus, having noom; oocno, coonatus, having dined ■ prandeo, pranaus, having breahfatted ; pOto, potus, having drunk. Chapter XX. — Defective Verbs. § 120. Defective Verbs are such as want many Tenses and Persons. I. Coepi, I began. II. Memini, I remember. III. Odi, I hate. IV. Novi, I know. These three Verbs are used only in the Perfect Tenses ; but the three latter have a present signification. Perfect. Past-Perfect. Future-Perfect. Perfect. Past-Perfect. Future. CoepI Coepgram CoepSro INDICATIVE. MSmlnl MSmlneram MSminiro Perfect. SUBJUNCTIVE. CoepSrim MemlnSrim Coepiflsem USmlnissem IMPERATIVE. (wanting.) MSmento MSmentSte INFINITIVE. CoepissS UgminissS OdI AdSram Odgro OdSrim Odissem OdissS Novi Noveram NovSro N5v8rim Novissem (wanting. Novisse PARTICIPLE. Future. Coeptflrfts (wanting.) Osiirfis Obt. 1. Instead of coepi and its Tenses, the Passive coeptus sum, &c., is us^d before an Infinitive Passive : as, urbs aedlftoan coepta est, the city began ia ae ouili, Obs. 2. Novi is properly the perfect of Nosco, to learn to know. SM. L. G. 1 74 DEFECTIVE VEEBS. § 131 1 / § 121. V. Aio, I say, has only the following forms :- Indicative. Subjunctive. Presmt. iS. Aio Ais ^iag Ait Aiat Aiont Alant InDICATIVK. SUBJUNCTIl^K. Past- Imperfect. S. Aiebam Aiebas Aiebfi,t P. Aiebamus Aiebatis Aiebant iMPEEiPKCT PaRVICIPLE. Aiens. 0b3. The form aisne, sayest thou! is often contracted into ain'. forms:- ^^' ^'''^''^°'' '"^ ^' ^^' ^"""^^ ^'^^ following INDICATIVE. Present. laquam Inquis Inquit Inquiiuus Inquitis Inquiunt Future. — Inquies Inquiet Past-Imperfect. Inquiebam Inquiebas Inquiebat Inquiebamiis Inquiebatis Inquiebant Perfect. Inquisti Inquit Present. IMPERATIVE. Inqug I Future. 2 Pers. Inquito ""^J^^^^. "-^^"^^ '-^'r-y^ '^'-^ always used after othe, thf folLTng foSf:'- ^^""'' ^ ''^P^"^^*' ^« --^ -ly - Indicative. Subjunctive. I Impehativk Infinitive. Present. Present. S. Fare Pari Fatur Future. Fabor, fabitur Perfect. Fatus sum &c. Fatus aim &c. Past-Perfect. Fatiis eram Fatus essem Participles. Imperfect. Fantis ^o. (without a ■n ,. , Norn.') Perfest. Fatus (a, um) Gerundive. Fandiis (a, urn) Supine — Fatu, Gerund — Fandi &c. i 12G. IMPERSONAL VEEB». 76 § 124. VIII. Salve, hail! is found in tho Imperat. salve salve te, salveto ; in the Injin. salvere ; and in the Futut-l salvebis. IX. Ave (have), hail! is found in the Imperat. ave avete, aveto ; and in the Lifm. avere. ' X. Apage, begone ! (tho only form). XI. Cedo, pi. (cedite) cette, give me, tell me, are Impeia tives of an obxolote Verb. XII. Quaeso, / entreat, quaesumus, we entreat, are the only forms used in this sense. Chapter XXI. — Impersonal Verbs. § 125. Impersonal Verbs are such as cannot have a Per- sonal subject (I, thou, he), and are used only in the Third Person Singular. § 126^ The following ^are the principal ImpersonaJ I. Vkiibs which denote Mental States, etc. Decet, decuit, decere, a is seemly. Dedecet, dedecuit, dedecere, u is unseemly. Libet, libuifc & libitum est, Ifoere, it pleases IlQet, licuit & licitum est, lioere, it is lawful. Liquet, liquere, it ,-,. ^i^^^.^ Misoret or miseretur, miseritum est, inisererS. it excites pity. 6portgt, oportuit, oportere, a behoves. Pipt, piguit & pigitum est, pigere, it vexen. Placet, placuit or placitum est, placerS, it pleases. Poenitet, poenituit, poenitere, it causes sorroi: Piidet, piiduit or puditum est, piider-e, it shames. Taedet, (pertaesum est,) taedere, it disgusts. Obs. All these Verbs belong to the Second Conjugation. II. Verbs which denote Atmospherical Phenomena. Grandlnat, 1, anaih, Ningpft, ninxit, ningere, itenoivs. Pliiit, pluit or pluvit, pluerg, H rains. E 2 76 ADVERBS. «127. Ton&t, tSnuIt, tSnarg, ^, ,^ , Lticescit, (iUuxIt,) luofiscere, tt thunders Vespgrascit, veflp§^a^a-t, vesperascgrg ""'* '''^'^'• /,*, AT ; ^sperascere, evening approaches. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. Past-Imperfect. Future. Perfect. Past-Perfect. Future-Perfect. Ptldgt Piidebat PQdebit Pfiduit Pudugrat Pildugrit Piideat Piidergt Pfiduerrt Pizduisset Infinitive. I Pfiderg / Piidoisse Piidgt me, Pudgt te, .Piidgt eum, Pfidgt nos, PQdet vos, Piidet eos, it shames me, or I am ashamed tt shames thee, or thou art ashamed. It shames him, or he is ashamed it shames us, or we are ashamed It shames you, or you are ashamed, tt shames them, or they are ashamed i^vlr^XT^!'" ^"'^^ ^^^ ^-^ - *^^ P-sive Voice Currlt^, It^, ventum est *c. .They) run, erto. of the Adverb is fonned from the Super- §132. ADVERBS. 77 lative of the Adjective by changing the final syllable of the latter into e. Adjectives. doctus, aeger, forcis, simllis, acer, feliz, learned, aich, brave, like, keen, lucky. Positive. doote prudens, prudent. Adverhsi. Comparative. doctius aegre {toith difficulty) aegrius fortiter fortius simmter simiUus acriter acrius feliciter felicius prudenter prudentius § 130. If the Adjectives are irregular parison, the Adverbs also are irregular. Superlative. doctissimg aegerrime fortissime simillime acerrime fellcissime prudentissims in their Com- Adjectives. bonus, good, malus, had, irultus, much, magnus, great, propinquus, near, (pro) prior, hefore. Positive. bgng m§,18 multum propS Adverbs. Comparative. melius pejus plus mag^ prSpius prius §131. Only the following Adverbs, not Adjectives, are compared : — Positive. ^% for a long time, nflper, lately, saepg, often, s2cu3, otherwise, tompeii (tempSri), timely, Comparative. diutius saepius secius temperins Superlative. optime pessime plUrimum mazime prozime primum & primo derived from Superlati^ie. diutisslme nuperrime saepisslme §132. Many Adverbs were oiiginaUy particular Cas^s ot bubstantjves, Adjectives, or Pronouns : as, tempSri, tempgri, from tempus, seasonably (see § 131) graKsJrratiis), „ gratia, for thanks, i. e. for nothing. mgjatus (ingrafis), „ ingratia, y^uhout thanks, against any foras, fons, fora (o6«.) = fSris, abroad. [on«'« will noctfl, „ noctus (o&s.) = nox, by night. diu, old ahl, of dies, hy day.* perpgram,acc. 8in^./. ofperpgrus, wrongly. * In this sense only in the phrase noctu diuque (rare). 78 PREPOSITIONS. ^ 134. Chapter XXIII.— Prepositions;. § 134. Of the Prepositions some govern the Accusative Case, some the Ablative, and some either the Accusative or the Ablative. Their construction is explained in the Syntax. § 135. I. With the Accusative alone. Ad, Adversus, Adversum, Ante, Apud, Circa, circum, Circiter, Cis & citra, Contra, Erga, Extra, Infra, Inter, Intra, Juxta, to. wpposite, totvards. before. near. around. about. on this side of against. towards (of th: outside of [miud) below. between^ among. inside of, tmihin. hard hij, beside. 61), Penes, Per, Pone, Post, Praeter, Prope, Propter, Secundiun, Supra, Trans, Ultra, Versus, Versum, on account of. in the power of. through. behind. after. beside, near. on account of. following, along, in ae- cordance with. above, across, on the farther side of. [towards. Ohs. Versus is always placed after thr Accusative : as, Romam versfls, toxcards Rome. § 136. II. With the Ablative alone. A, ab, or abs, Absque (rare), C5ram, Cum, by or from. without. in the presence of, with. down from, from. Ex or e, out of. Prae, before. Pro, in front of, before. Sine, without. Tenus, reaching to, as far as. Obs. 1. ^6 is used before vowels and h; both a and ub before consonants ; abs very seldom except in the phrase abs te. Obs. 2. Ex is used before vowels and h; both ex and e before consonants. Obs. 3, TSniis is always placed after the Ablative : as, pectSrg tgnOs, as far as the bre..J. § 137. III. With the Accusative or Ablative. to.. in, into, J Super, over. Siib, up to, under. \ Subter, under. Clam, without the hnowledijC of. In and Sub -with tiie Ace, answer the question Whither? with the Abl, the question WJiere ? § 138. Obs. 1. Some Prepositions are used as Ad\erb8; as, ant^, clam, coram, coutrll, post, praet r, propter. § las. PREPOSITIONS. 79 Obs, 2. Prepositions, in composition with other -words, frequently undergo euphonic changes. The most common change is the assimilation of the final consonant of the Preposition lo the initial consonants of the wordi with which it is combined : as, allSquor from ad and ISquor. Abi abs. Ab remains unchanged before vowels and most consonants. Before m and v it becomes a: as, a-moveo, a-vgho. Ab becomes au in au-f^ro, au-fcigio. ^64 stands before c and i only : as, abs-cedo, abs- tineo. M remains unchangei. before d, j, in, v: as, ad-do, ad-.jSceo, ad-niTror, ad-veho. The d is assimilated before most other consonants : as, ac ccdo, af-f(5ro, ag-g^ro, ap-pono, ac-quiro, as-sisto, as-sumo. The d is omitted before s followed by a consonant, and (/« ; as, a-sp!cio, a-gnosco. Com (instead of cum) remains unchanged before the labials p, b, m : as, com-po.-., com-Wbo, com-mitto. The w is assimilated before I, n, r : as, col-ligo, con-necto, cor-rlpio. The m is changed into m before the other consonants : as, con-feio, con-gC'vo, con -traho. The m is dropped before vowels and h : as, co-alesco, co-eo, C(j-haereo. Ex remains unchanged befcre vowels and the consonants c, p, q, s, t : as, ex-eo, ex-clpio, ex-p6no, ex-quiro, ex-solvo, ex-truho. The x is assimi- lated before/; as, ef-fero. The x is omitted before the remaining con- sonants : as, e-llgo, e-jKcio. In becomes im befoi-e the labials p, b, m : as, im-p6no, im-buo, im-mitto. The ?i is assimilated before I and r : ds, il-ludo, ir-rumpo. Before other consonants and vowels it remains unchanged. Inter undergoes assimilation only in the verb intel-ligo and its deri- A'atives. Ob undergoes assimilation before c,f, g, p. as, occurro, of-rero, og-g?ro, op-pono. Per undergoes assimilation only in pel-llcio and its derivatives. Sub undergoes assimilation before c, /, g, m, p, and often before r : suc-curro, suf-ficio, sug-g?ro, sum-mitto, sup-pono, sur-ripio. Trans is frequently shortened into tru : as, tra-duco, trii-jtcio. Obs. 3. Inseparable Prepositions occur only in composition, Amb, around: as, amb-io, to go around; amb-!go, to wander around. The b is dropped before p : as, am-ptito, to cut around or aioay ; am- plector, to twine around or embrace. Amh becomes an before gutturals and / ; as, an-ceps, two-headed ; an-quiro, to seek around ; an-fractus, a bending. Dis or di, in different directions : as, dis-.p6no, to set in different parts ; dl-rlpio, to tear in pieces. Before /, dis becomes dif: as, dif-fundo, to pour in different directions, RS or red» back : as, r6-mitto, to send back ; red-eo, to go back. Se, aside .' as, se-diico, to lead aside ; se-curus, free from care. as. 80 CONJUNCTIONS. §13^ Chapter XXIV.— Conjunctions. § 139. Conjunctions may be divided into the following classes : ° I. Connective. £t, AtqtiS, Qu8 Aut, V«l, vS, tis, ac, i J and. > either, or. N§qu§, ngc, Nevg, neu, Sive, 80a, Necnon, Etiam, QuSque, > neither, nor. or if. also. Ohs. 1 aue and ve are always added to the end of the second of the two words which they unite, and must be pronounced with it, as if they formed a single word: as, terra marlqu6, by land and by sea ; plQ, xahmiv^, more or less. Such Avords are called encUtics. ^*ng^u6^Sg7g^', e^''' "^'^' °^^ ^'° contractions respectively of atqug, v#I, Ohs. 3. Ac is never used before vowels or A ; atru6 occurs most frequentlv beiore vowels, but also before consonants. irequeniiy To these may be added the correlatives non modo (solum) .... sed (verum) etiam, not only hut also : quum (tum) turn, both and. Sed, Autem, Ast, at, Atque, SI, Nisi, ni, Sin, Etd, £tiamsi, T&me*a, Licet, Quaoquam Qunm, Quia, quod, Quoniam, II. Adversative. T&men, Verum, vero, £nimvero, I Attamen, III. Conditional. tfnot. tfnot; hit if. Dun, M5d5, SnmmSdo, although. IV. Concessivk. Qoamvis, Qnnm, Qoidem, m, yet, nevertheless, but, indeed, but indeed. but yet. Iprovided that. however much, al- uUhough, [though, indeed. granting that, al- though. V. Causal. whereas, since. because. since. litaanddqiudem, seeing thtU. ! Nam, Enim, £tenim, and in fact. §140. INTEBJECTIONS. 81 Ergo, Idcirco, Ideo, igirtr, } therefore. VI. Conclusive. It&qug, Quocircft, Qo&re, Qu&proptir, , } ajid 80, accordingly, wherefore. Ot, Quo, Quin, Quomlniig, Priusquasi, FoBtquam, VII. Final. Uhat, in order that. } NS, that not. ^®^S» »e^» VIII. Temporal. - " ' \hefore that. after that. Donee, Quoad, Dum, that not, lest, and that . . . not. [so long as, until. SImalatque (ac), as soon as. Nora — Concerning the uses of the above Conjunctions, see Syntax. Chapter XXV. — Interjections. § 140. Interjections are not so much parts of speech as substitutes for definite sentences. They are mostly sounds or cries expressive of emotion. They may be divided into the following classes :— 1. Of surprise: 0! eu! ecce! papae! &tat! etc. . 2. Of grief : ah! eheu(heu)! hei! vae! etc. 3. Of joy: io! ha! evoe! eu(euge)! ei". 4. Oftiisgust: phul! &p&ge! etc. 5. Of adjuration : pr6 (proh) ! To this may be added the abbrevi- ated oaths meherole (meheroiile, hende, etc.), pel, edSpol, mSdiusfldlus, and the like. e3 82 GENDEHS OF SUBSTANTIVES. §U1. APPENDIX A. ii n* Chapter XXVI.-The Genders op Substantives. GENERAL RULES. GENDER ASCERTAINED BY THE MEANING. 2. Females, Countries, Islands, Towns, and TVees are J^emimne. ^ Oba. In the ease o: 8ome animals sex is dlsreifarded • thus «nn*io . ; vulpes, fox, are always feminine ■ Jhf. .x " I ' ^ "'*' *"^'^' *"'* E.;ssr •■---- sr/u== ™":£ 3. Indeclinable Substantives, as, Fas, nefas, nihil, instSr, are Neuter. ' fas, permitted by heaven. nSfas, no* pei-mitted by heaven. nIhKl, nothing. instar, resemblance. 4. Substantives denoting both the male aad the female, as, „^ /> ^*^^®' conjux, sacerdos, testis are Common. civis, a ciYj^en (male or female") I tser, gris, uber, Sris, the spring, a corpse, a Journey, a swelling, the chick-pea. pepper. a plant (skirret). an udder. zingiber, pftpftver, suber, &cer, slier, verber, spinther, linter, Sris, ginger. Sris, the poppy, Sris, the cork-tree. Sris, the maple. Sris, a withy. Sris, a whip, scourge. Sris, a kind of bracelet, tris (/.), a wherry. 5. In 68, increasing in tiio Genitive. Feminine are rSquies, Quiee, merces, mergSs, tgggg, Compes, inquies, and eggSs. ,>rest. quies, etis, rSquies, etis, f inquies, stis, restlessness. mercfts, cdis, toages. mergSs, Itis, tggSs, Stis, compes, Sdis, sSgSs, Stis, a sheaf of com. a mat. a fetter, standing com. § 146. Second Principal Rule iFeminine). X, as, aus, and is, S preceded by a consonant, Es not increasing in Genitive, are i^mm«/i«. -Examples : Pax, pacis, peace ; libertas, atis ^r^S^; lans, laudis,^ra«... navis. is. a ,h^ ; nrbs, urbS, a <%; nubes, IS, a cZoM(/. ' ' □ i^a IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) //. // / r/. i.O I.I 1.25 S lis 112.0 1.4 1.6 7] m /, %. m m w ''••/ om Photographic Sdences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14S8C (716) 872-4503 •. ,K .' 86 GENDERS OF SUBSTANTIVES. §145 Exceptions. 1. In X. Masculine are words in ex : Feminine nlone are lex, SiipeUex, cdrex, Uex, nex. lex, stlpellex, naiex, ilex, nex. legis, a law. lectiWa, furniture, Icis, a kind of n^sh. ids, the scarlet oak. ngcis, violent death. 2. In as. Six Masculina end in as : As {assis), mas, and SlSphds, Vda (vadis), glgds, adamds. as, assis, mas, maris, filSphfis, autis, vfis, vadis, gKgas, antis, a Roman coin, a male, an elephant, a surety, a giant. In is. Many Nouns which end in is Are Mascflllui gfingris : Pdnis, piacia, crinia, finis. Ignis, lapis, pulvia, ctnis, Orbis, amnis, and cdndlis, Sanguii, unguis, glis, anndlis. panis. IS, piscis, is. crinis. is, ftnis, is. ignis, is. lapis. Id is, pnlvis, Sris, dnis, Sris, orbis. is, amnis. is, c&nftlis. is, sanguis, Knis, unguis. is, gli^. iris. aunalis ( usu. plur fascis. is. axis, is, ftlnis. is. ensis, is, bread, a fish, hair, an end, fire, a stone, dust, ashes, a circle, a river, a conduit, blood. a finger- or toe-nail, a dormouse. ,), a year-book, a bundle, an axle, a rope, a sword. Masculine are trddux, calix. Phoenix too, as well as fornix. tradux, ftcis, a vine-branch. calix, k'is, a cup, phoenix, icis, a fabulous bird. fornix, Icis, an arch. The Neuter Nouns which end in as Are Vds {vdais), fda and ngfds. adamas, antis, a diamond. vas, fas (indecl.), nSfas (indecl.), vasis, a vessel. permitted by heaven, not permitted by heaven. Fascis, axis, fdnis, ensie, Fuatis, vectis, vomis, mensis. Vermis, torris, cucumia, Postia, foUis, mdgJlis, Cassis, catilis, callis, coUis, Sentis, torquis, penis, poUis. IS, is. a cudgel, a lever. fustis, vectis, vOmis, (more freq.) , , , vomer) 6ris,r^^''"^''*^^«''^- mensis, is, c month. vermis, is, a worm, torris, is, a firebrand, cflcttmis, is, and Sris, a cucumber. postis, is, a doorpost. follis, is, a pair of bellows. mugllis(usu,mugil), a mullet. cassis (plur. ium), a net. caulis, is, a stalk. callis, ccllis, sentis. IS, is. IS. a path, a hill, a bramble. torquis (also es), is, a chain for the pSnis, is, a tail. [neck pollis, Knis, fine flour, meat. § 146. GENDEIiS OF SUBSTANTIVES. iJ7 *• \" ■ preceded by a consonant : Masculine are pons and fmj, Hydrops, tor,'ens, gryps.Scmons, pons, fons, hydrops, torrens, gryps, mons, tis, a bridge. tJs» a fountain, Opis, dropsy. tis, a torrent. giyphis, a griffin. ti a mountain. In 68. Masculines which end in es Are verree and aclndces. Adeps, rudens, Sriens, Dens and trldens, occXdene. adeps, rtidens, Sriens, dens, trldens, occ'Idens, verres. Xpis, fat. entis, a eahle- tis. the east. tis. a tooth. tis. a trident. tis. the west. . is, a hoar-pig. Ss, is, a scihiitar. § 14G. Third Principal Mule (Neuter). A, e, and c, L, n, and t, are .^.-Examples : FoemP., Uh, a poem ; mSre is the sea; lac lactis, milk; animSl, alis, an animal ; nom£ Tnis « 5?;r« s; ' ^^""' ^ "-• ^'°"^' ^^^«' ^^^htnin,';^:^^: Exceptions. 1. In 1. Masculines in 1 are magtl, Sol and consul, sal and pUgrl. mvlgii, lis, a mullet. sOl, sOlis, the sun. consul, lis, a consul. sa), salis, salt. piigil, lis, a boxer. 2. Inn. Masculines in n are ren, splen, PectSn, lien, attagen. ren, renis (usu. in pi.), the kidney. I splen, gnis, the spleen. j pectgn, Inis, a comh. lien, enis, the spleen. attagen, enis, a heathcock. 3. In ur. Masculines in ur Sive furfur, Astur, mUur,fur, and turtur. furfur, tlris, bran. astur, uris, a hawk. vultur, iiris, a vulture. 4. In us. The Masculines which end in as Are iSpus (iSpdris) and mils. 18pus, 6ris, mus, m(iris. fur, uris, a thief. turtur, uris, a turtle-dove. a hare, a mouse. 88 GENDERS OF SUBSTANTIVES. iui. 5. In OS. The Feminines which end in ns Are Juventus, virtm, aervUiig, SSnectus, teUus, incut, sSlut, Add pSeSa (jpScudia) and pSlu$. jtlventas, utis, youth. inc^. tidis, OH anvil. virtus. utis, virtue. s&l&s, utis. safety. servltus, utis, slavery. pgciis, tldiSy cuttle. sSnectfls, utis. old-age. p&lOs, udis, amarah. tellus, uris the earth. § 147. IV. FouBTH Declension, Principal Eule. Us is Masculine. U is Neuter. Exertions. Feminines which end in us : I Ddmus, nunu, soorus, Snxu, Tribua, acus, poHieus, \ Idiis (iduuin) and tnSnw. tribus, a tribe (a division of the Roman people), ftcus, a needle, porticus, a portico. dOmus, a house. ntLru3, a daughter-in-law. socrus, a mother-in-lavo. Snus, an old-woman. idus (p/.), the Ides (a divieion of th« Roman month), m&niis, a hand. § 148. V. Fifth Declension. Rule, All are Feminine except dies (m^ndies), which in the Plural is always Masculine, and in the Singular either Masculine or Feminine. §149. FIRST CONJUGATION. 89 APPENDIX B. Chapter XXVII.— Perfects and Supines OP Verbs. I. The Fisst Conjugation. § 149. The Perfects and the Supines of the First Coniu- gation end regularly in avi, atum: as, Smo, Smavi, Smatum, amare, to love. The following are exceptions — 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Crgpo, Cttbo, D6mo, S6no, Veto, TOno, Mico, Pllco, Frico, S6co, crgpui, ctibui, dOmui, s6uui, vfitui, tSnui, mlciii, fpllcui, \pllcavi, fricui, sScui, |N6co (regular) "•«"m. 18. Do in composition, Abdo, abdidi, abditum, Addo, addldi, addltmn, Condo, condldi, condltiun, i3 Cado, 14. Caedo, 15. Pendo, Ifi. Tendo, 17. Tuudo, Reduplication. cadCre, to fall. cuedSre, to strike. pondCre, to hang, to leeigh. tondSre, to stretch. tundgre, to heat. Dedo, dedlui, dedltuni, Edo, (idldi, editum, Indo, indidi, indltum, Perdo, perdldi, perditum, Prodo, prodldi, prodltum, Reddo, reddldi, reddltura, Subdo, subdidi, subditum, Trado, tradldi, tradltura. Credo, credldi, crodltum, Vendo, vendldi, vondihira, 19. Sisto, stiti, statum, to put. abdgre, to put a way, to hide. add(5re, to put to, to add. coivldre, to put together, to build, hide. dedCre, to put down, to sur- render. edCro, to put forth, to pub- lish. indCre, to put on. perdSre, to ruin, to lose. prodSre, to betray. reddCre, to put hack, to re- store, subdfire, to put under , to sub- stitute. tradSre, to put across, to de- liver up. credgre, to believe, trust. vendSre, to sell. sistSre, to cause to stand, (e.) Perfect— i. Supine— avm.. 20 f ( Cando) * lAccendo, accendi, accensum, accendSre, to set on fire. 21, Cudo cudi, cusum, cudgre, to hammer. 22. Edo, edi. esum, 6d6ro, to eat. 9 160. PERFECTS AND SUPINES. chor.Ked into f. 23. 24. 25. 2(j. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. ((Pendo not U8od, Defcado, defendi. defonsura, Offendo, offcndi, oflfensuni. FOdio, fodi, fossurn, Pundo, fudi, fiisum, Muudo, miiiuli, niansum, (riiro,) Pando, pundi. /Pa»8um, ipussum, FrChcndo, prChcndi, prClienaum, Scando, Hcandi, scanaum, stridi, — dt'fendCro, ofi'undCro, fodCre, t'liiidoro, niaiuldro, 95 to strike.) to loitrd of, to de fend, to »trihe arjainsl, to ansdult. to ditj. to linlir. to cheio. { Strldo, ( Stiideo, Verto, Findo, Scinuo, (Frendo, (.Frendeo, pandCie, to g/read. preheudgre, to grasu. to cliinh. verti, fidi, scldi, versiim, flsaum, scissum, ffressiiin, \fresum, scundOre, stridOre, vertCre, fiiid(5re, seiiidCro, frondCre, to creuJi. to turn. to deave. to tear. to (jHush the teeth. (d.) Other Forms. 35. Meto. 36. P6to, 37. Sido, tiway,tohide. to, to add. 39 Fido, together, to i, hide. doion, to sur- §16( er. forth, to pub- m. 1. Alo, , to lose. ^y- 2. Colo, hack, to re- Consalo, 4. Molo, ndet , to sub- 5. Occaio, e. 6. Volo, icross, to de- 7, Frgmo, up. 8. G6mo, ve, trust. 9. Trgmo, 10. V6mo, i to stand. 11. Gigno. I fire. 12. Fallo. ner. 13. Pello, 14. Cano, messui, pStivi or pgtii, sedi (rarely sidi), stertui. fisus sum, mcssum, pCtitura, nii5tfiro, p6tdro, to mow, to seek. sidCre, to settle down. stortSre, fidfire, to snore, to trust. . — ■ Verbs the Stems of which end in L, M N. (a.) Perfect— vd. Supine— Itxm or tmn. aiui, c61ui, constllui, molui, occalui, volui, frCmui, gfimui, trgmui, vomui, ggiiui. ailtum or altum, cultum, consul turn, mOlItum, occultura, frt'inltum, gCmltum, vomltum, gignSre, alSre, colSre, consQl(5re, mOlgre, occQlgre, velle, frSmgre, gfimfire, trSmgre, vomgre, gSnItum, (&.) Perfect with Reduplication. ftfeiii, falsum, fallfire, pSpuli, pulsum, pellgre, cgcini, cantmn, cangre, to nourish. to till, to consult, to grind, to conceal, to wish. to roar, to groan, to tremble, to vomit. to produce. to deceive, to drive* to ting. 96 15. Como, IH. Dcino, 17. Prorao, 18. Sumo, 19. Tomno, 20. Percello, 21. Paallo, 22. Velio, 23. Tollo, 24. fimo, 25. PrCmo, 26. Lrno, 27. Slno, THIRD CONJUGATION. f 161 (o.) Perfect- A. compsi, deinpsi, prorapsi, surapsl, tempsi. comptiim, dompturn, promptum, Humphitn, toin])tum. Supine — tmu. fr)mCro, dcmCre, promCro, HfunCre, tomnSru, percflli, psalli, velh, Bustali, emi, f)rosfli, evi, sivi. (d.) Other forms. porculsum, pcrcellfire, — psallCro, vulsum, sublutum, ornptiun, prc'HHum, lltum, Hitum, vellfire, tollero, CmCro, prCraCre, llnfire, slnGre, to adorn, to take away, to take out. to take up, to devpiae. to ttrike dmon. to play on a stringed instrument, to pluck, to raise up, to buy or take, to press, to smear, to permit. ^''Jwof'^""'' ^^'^°' ^''"'"°' '^'"° *■"" "°'"P°""'^'' o' "on, de, pro, „ih, and § 161.— Verhs the Stems of which end in R. 1. Cerno, 2. Sperno, a. Sterno, 4. G6ro, 5. "Dro, 6. Curro, 7. Ffiro, 8. Par-io, 9. Quaero, 10. Sgro, 11. SSro, 12. TSro, 13. Verro, 1. 2. 3. 4. 6. 6. 7. 8. 9. crevi, sprevi, Btravi, gessi, ussi, cQcurri, tdli, pfipfiri, quaesivi, sfirui, ere turn, spretum, stratum, gestum, ustum, cursum, latum, partum, qunesltum, sertum. seyi, satum, trivi, tritum, verri, versum. cernfire, spemfire, sternSre, gCrgre, urgre, currfire, ferre, parSre, quaerfire, sCrSre, sSrgre, tgrCro, verrgre, to sift, to divide. to despise. to strew. to carry, to bum. to run. to bear, carry. to produce, to seek. to put in rows, to plait, to sow. to rub. , to sweep. § 162.~ Verbs the Stems of which end in S, X. Depso, depsui, depstum, depsSre, to knead. Piuso, Piso, Viso, Pono, Arcesso, Capesso, Facesso, Lacesso, fpinsui, Jpinsltum', . , \pmsi, (pinaum, Pinsgre, _ — pistum, pi8gre, ^i^^», — visgre, posui, pSsItum, pongre, arcessivi, arcessitum, arcessgre, capessivi, capessltum, capessgre f&cessi, facessitum, f^cessgre,' lacessivi, lacessitum, lacessgre. to pound. to pound, to visit, to place, to send for. to take in hand, to make, to cause, to provoke. XerffcrTens'er* " '''' *'° " '^^^ *^^ strengthening letter of tU. f«ft. PEUFECT8 AND SUPINES. § 103.— Verhn the Stems of which end in U, V. 97 1. Acuo, 2. Ar;?uo, 3. Iinl)iin, 4. Iruliio, 5. Kxuo, 0. Mlauo, 7. Kqo, 8. Spuo, 0. Statuo, 10. Suo, 11. Tribuo, 12. Lavo, 13. Solvo, 14. Volvo. 15. Coiigruo, It). Liio, ((Nuo. 17. JAbnuo, (Aniiuo, 18. MCtuo, 1!). Pluit, 20. Sternuo. Perfect -i. Supine— turn. &cui, acutura, argtii, arf?utum, imhui, irabutuin, i'xlui, iiidutuiu, exui, cxiitum, miiiui, mluutum, rui, ratuni, spui, sputum, Btatui, statutum, flui, sutum, tribiii, trtbiitum, luvi, Bolvi, volvi, congrui, lui, abniii, atuiui, mCtui, pluit or pliivit, sternui. (lautum, (lotum, B^hitum, vOlutum, aciiCrc, inil)udre, iiuluCre, oxufiro, mInuCre, ruCre, spufiro, statuCre, BuCro, tilbuCro, lavCro, solvCro, volvCre, congruCre, luCro, abnuCro aiiiiuCro, iiifitufire, plufire, to sKarpan. to prove, to $nak, io put on. to put off. to lessen, to rush, to spit, to set up. to sew, to dislributo. to wash. to loosen, to roll, to agree, to atone, to nod.) to re/use. to assent, to fear, to rain. — BternuCre. to rn^cne. Obs, In fluo, atruo, vivo, the Stem ends in c or i,. See § 1 58, Nos. 51.52,58. § 1G4.— Verbs the Present Tense of which ends in SCO. Verbs ending in sco are Inceptive, that is, denote the beginning of an action. They are formed from Verbs bubstantives, and Adjectives. See § 194, 2. §105. Inceptives formed from Verbs have the Perfects of the Verbs from which they are derived, but usually no bupmes : as, incalesco, incalui, incalescere, to grow warm, Irom caloo, calui, caiere, to he warm. The following Incen- tives are exceptions and have Supines : » i' 1. AbQlesco, abOlevi, abOlItum, abSlescSre, adOleacfire, ex6lescCre, oOalescfire, to grow out of use. to grmo up. to grow old. to grow togc iher. 2. AdQlesco, adOlevi, adultum, 8. ExWesco, ex61evi, exolltum, 4. CSalesco, cDalui, cCalltum, 6. Ooncttpisco, concapivi, concQpitum, conciipiscSre. to Zre. (cflpio) ^' ^Tvaieor* ''°''''^^"'' convailtum. convaiescSre. to grow strong. ^' ^TaSr ^^^^^' ®^^^«""^ exardescgre, totahefire. SM. L. G. P 98 FOURTH OONJUGATION. §166. ^' ^"(SSo) ^''^^'^''' '■'^^C'^ratum. invetgrascgre. to grm old ^' ^YSuo)' ^^^"""^^^' obdortuitum. obdormiscere, tofaU asleep. 10. B^vly^oo, revixi, revictum, rgvivisc6re. ^o come io life 11. Scisco scivi. .citurr, sciscgre, toart;b.o«,. w. ell. oe. m, to know. d. ome quiet. row aecusr med. Tkne 0, The gnise. »» to know. ends re- auditum, §171. 3. Haiirio, 4. Sancio, 5. Sarcio, 6. Sentio, 7. Saepio, 8. Vincio, 9. Eo, '0. Saiio, 11. SfiptJlio, 12. Venio, 13. Amicio, H. ApSrio, 15. Opgiio DEPONENTS. hauai, sanxi, sarsi, sensi, saepsi, vinxi, ivi, s&lui or- s&Ui, s6p6iivi, veni, famlcni, (amixi, apSrui, 6p8rui, • haustum, fsancitum, \ sanctum, eartiana, sensun,, eaept^un, vinctum, Ituiu, stilti'ia, sCpultnm, ventum, amictuni. apertiun, ftpertum. haurire, sancire, sareire, senfii-e, saepire, vincire, iro, saiire, sSpfilire. v6nire, 99 to draw (water). to ratify. to patch. to feel, to think. to fence in. to bind. to go. to leap. to bury, to come. araicire, to clothe. apgrire, •Jpfirire, to open, to cover. y. Deponent?, § 169. In tJ^ First Conjugation the Perfects and Supines are all regular. I (Fateor, ' lOonl'iteor 2. Liceor, 3. Medeor, 4. Mcieor 5. Misgn or, 6. Polllceor, 7. Reor, 8. Tueor, 9. V6reor, 1. Fruor, 2. Fimgor, 3. Gradior, 4. Labor, 5. Liquor, 6. LSquor, 7. Morior, 8. 27itor, 9. Patior, 10. Qugror, 11 tj: 12. SSquor, § 170. Second Conjugation, iassus sum, confiissus sum, llcitus sum, mSrltus sum, mlsfiritus sum or mtsertus sxun, pollicltus sum, ratus sum, tultus sum, vgritus sum. i^teri, conflteri, llceri, mSden, mgreri, mlsSrSri, polliceri, reri, tueri, vgreri, § 171. Third Conjugation^ r(fructus sum), . . ( fm!ftus sum, "'"^» functus sum, fungi, gressus sum, grfidi,' lapsus sum, labi, (liquefactus sum), liqui, iScutus sum, iSqui, mortuus sum, mori,' ( nixus sum, (nisus, "^"» passus sum, pati, questus sum, qufiri, — ringi, sficutus cum, sSqui, to confers. to confess. to bid {at a sale). to heal. to earn, to deserve. to take pity on. to promise, to think. to look upon, jiTo- to fear. \te(^. to enjoy. to perform, to step, to slip. to melt, to speak, to die. to strain. to suffer. to comi'>la7n, to show the teeth, to snail. iofoiUow. f2 100 DEPONENTS. 9 m. 13. Utor, 14 ((Verto) ' ( Rgvertor, j(Plecto) 15. JAinplector, IComplector, (Adipiscor, 17. Commlniscor, 18. Rgmlniscor, 19. DefStiscor, 20. Expergiscor, 21. Irascor, 22. Nanciscor, 23. Nascor, 24. Obliviscor, 25. Paciscor, 26. PrQftciscor, 27. Ulciscor, 28. Vescor, usus dam. uti. to U€e. (rCvcrsus sum), rgverti, to return. amplexus sura, complexus simi, aptua smn, adeptus sum, commeatus sum, defessus sum, experrectus sum, nactus sum, natus sum, oblitus sum, pactus smn, profectus sum, ultus sum, amplecti, ] complecti,/ apisci, adipisci, commlnisci, r{?mmisci, defStisci, expergisci, irasci, nancisci, nasci, oblivisci, pacisci, prQficisci, uleisci, vesci, to embrace. to chiain. to obtain, to devise, to remember, to grow weary, to wake up. to be angry, to obtain by chance, to be born, to forget. to make an agree- ment, to set out. to avenge to eat. §172. Fourth Conjugation. 1. Assentior, assensus sum. assentiri, 2. Blandior, blanditus sum. blandiri, 3. Expgrior, expertus siun, expgriri, 4. OppSrior, oppertus sima, oppgritus, oppgriri. 5. Largior, largitus sum. larglri. 6. Meutior, mentltus sum, mentiri, 7. Metior, mensus sum. metiri. 8. Molior, molitus sum. moliri. 9. Ordior, orsus sum. ordiri. 10. Orior, ortus sum, oriri. 11. Partior, partitus sum, partiri. 12. Potior, p5titus sum. pQtu-i, 13. Punior, punitus sum. puniri, 14. Sortior, • sortitus sum. sortiri, to agree to. to flatter, to try, to wait for. to givebountifuUy. to lie. to measure, to labour, to begin. to rise, to divide, to obtain posses- sion of. to punish. to take by lot. In Orior the Pres. Ind. follows the 3rd Conjugation : «reris, Srttur, 6rlmur. In the Imperf. SubJ. both SrSrer and orlrer are found. The com- pounds co6rior and exorior, to arise, are conjugated like drior but adorior, to attack, has adSrlris, MSrltur. Compound Verbs. 1. The vowel of the simple verb is frequently changed m composition. The niles for these changes are eiven in § 206. ^ ^ ^ 2. In compound verbs the Iteduplication of the Perfect IS usually omitted. See § 107, 4, Obs. ^^^^' FORMATION OF WORDS. FORMATION OF WORDS. 101 Chapter XXVIII— Formation of Words. Derivation of Substantives. § 173. W(wds are either Simple or Compound. § 174. A Simple Word may be either, (1.) A Pure Root, without any addition whatever- as ad, ab, siib; ne or non; with other indeclinable words. Obs. Some words have become identical with pure roots by the loss of a ^ifflx properly belonging to them: as, fer, bear thou ; die, say thou , ■ for, a Mtc/; and the like. y "wu . r ^^ i^'K^ ^^^^ derived from a Single Root bv the addi- tion ot a buffix : as, dic^, dio-tio, dic-ax, from die. §175. A Compound Word is formed from two or more roots: as homieida, a manslayer, from hom-o, a man, and caed-o, to h'L § 176. A Root is always a monosyllable, and expresses an elementary notion. § 177.^ Suffix is a termination added to a root to modify Its meaning, but not intelligible by itself: as, the s of the ^ommative Case Singular in all Declensions except the l^irst; the Adjectival terminations -osus, -inus, -ilis. etc. ^^f; Sf ?^ '''^!.°^ convenience the term Suffix will hereafter be applied their infl^Sr "'^"^ '" *^^ derivation of words, without regard to KV^'^^ ^''^"^ ^® ^ syllable placed before the root to modity Its meaning : as, amb-io, to go around. In inflexion a prefix is found only in certain Tenses of Verbs : as, te tig-i (Koot, -tag), mo-mord-i (Root, mord), etc. § x:9. The Stem of a word is that part which remains ai.er taking away the inflexions : as, agiUs (Stem, agili) actwe ; vo.ens (btem, volant), vnUing ; from the Roots ag (act), vol (will). _ § 180 Some words are formed at once from the Root simply by adding the inflexional terminations. These arc called Primary Words; and in them the Root and the Stem are the same : as, Stem and Root ag-o, duc-o, dux (duc-s), rgg-o, rex freg-s), lego, lex (leg-s), pes, p6d-is, sol, solis, s&l, s&lis. AG, set in motion, act. uuc, lead. F'=G, rule. liEG, read. PED, the foot. SOL, the sun. SAL. salt. 102 DERIVATION OP SUBSTANTIVES. §18i. § 181. I. Substantives derived from Verbs. Subsiantives e derived from Verbs by the addition of the following Suffixes : — 1. or (to.) expresses the action or condition of the verb as an abstract substantive : as. am-or, clam-or, c&l-or, tlm-or, ftlv-or, far-or, love, a shout, warmth, fear, favour, madness. from amo clamo c&leo timeo ft,veo faro. 0J». When the Stem of the Verb ends in a vowel, the vowel is droppetl before the Suffix or. 2. tor (tjj.) denotes the doer : as. ama-tor, audi -tor, mOnl-tor, vic'tor, vena-tor, lec-tor. a lover, a hearer, an adviser, a conqueror, a hunter, a reader. from amo „ audio „ m5ueo vinco (root vie) venor lego. Most Substantives in tor have a corresponding Feminine ouDstantive in trix : as, conqueress. huntress. victor, victrix, venator, venatrix, Ohs. The Suffix tor is subject to the same changes that occur in the Supine • as, cursor, a runner, from curro (ciirsum). 3. io and tio {Gen. onis, /.) denote the action : as. obsld-io, a siege, from obsldeo obliv-io, forgetfulness, „ obliviscor contag-io, a touching, contagion, „ contingo, root (con'l tag ac-tio, doing, „ ago lec-tio, reading, „ iggo scrip-tio, writing, „ scribo. 4. tus (Gen. tus, m.) also denotes the action : as, ac-tus, doing, audi-tus, hearing, auc-tus, an increase, „ augeo can-tus, singing, „ cano. Obs. The Suffixes tio an.l tus undergo the same euphonic changes as occur in the Supine : as, versio and versus from verto ; visio and visus from video, 5. tflra also usually denotes the action : as. merca-tara, trading, from mercor aper-tura, an opening, „ apSrio cinc-tura, a girding, „ cingo luno-tura, a Joining, „ jungo. from ago „ audio si is dropped 182. DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 6. inm (n.) denotes an act or state : as. 108 gaud-ium, fid-ium, incend-ium, aedlflc-ium, J<*y» from gaudeo hatred, „ odi a conflagration, „ incendo a building, „ aedlftco. 7. m8ii {Gen. minis, n.) usuaUy denotes an instrument : as, flpmen, a river, from fluo lu-men. alight, „ iQceo sola-men, a consolation, „ solor teg-men, a covering, „ tSgo. Obs. The Suflax men has sometimes a Passive force : as, agmen. that xohieh is led, an army marching; gestumen, that which is carSd" etc 8. mentuin (n.) denotes an instrument : as, dijca-mentum, a proof, from dOceo impedi-mentum, a hindrance, „ impgdio mo-mentum, a moving farce, „ mOveo ornarmentum, an ornament, „ orno. gaberna-calum, a rudder, " KrL fer-oUnm, a tray. " |,„ fcST' "'^*- ." S™ luicrum, a prop e i • '"• '"^^ilr fa """""'' " »'^''' °'-Woh is the result o. § 182. II. Substantives derived from Substantives. Substantives are derived from Substantives by the ad dition of tne following Suffixes : ^ argent-arius, a silversmith, fron; r. --intum statQ-nrnis. a statuary, „ gtatua aer-arius, a coppersmith, „ aes sic-anus an assassin, „ sica. •I &vis „ cdlumba t« aes. 101 DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. § 182. 2. ftrium (n.) denotes the place where anything is kept : ae, a^arlir " ^P^r'^* from anna, orum avi-armm, an aviary, ' cfilumb-arium, a dove-cote, aer-arium, a treasury, Ohs. «««*and5rmmareproperlythe8ufflxe»ofAdjective3. 8ee§187.6. '• "^^Q^'^izzfzr^; ^'^^ ^^«° *^« p^-^ -^- '^^ ^m}V:'^'^ , censor » praetor. 5. imn (n.) denotes an employment, condition, &c • as exsu-ium, exile, p„„„i hospli^ium. hospitality, .'I ho'spes (-pitis). 6. al (n.) and ar («.) denote a material object : as, antm-al, an animal, from anima, life calcar, a spur, .. calx Scales). Zhed. 7. etnm (w.) affixed to names of trees or plants denotes the nl«P« Tot'tiveTy f i! " ' ^"^^*^*^' ^'^^ ^'^'^ *^- trs1hems& myrt-etnm, a myrtle-grove, from myrtus querc-etum, an oak-plantation, „ quercus 6hv-etum, an oUve-yard, £ ' vm-etum, a vineyard, „ yinea. '• ''plaSorl'^l.^at^^' ^'^ *'' ^^"" ^' ^'^"^^^^ ^-°*«« « gmllff' <^rio^stall, from bos, b5 vis equ-ile, a stable for horses, „ gquus 6v-ile. a sheep-fold, [', ^ Om. J/e is properly a neuter Suflix of Adjectives. See § 187, 4. ' §182. S 183. t: ae, rum 8ee§187, &. 9 where the us uu DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. § 183. Diminutives. 105 57,7. [esignatmg ^-dotis) Itis). life, the Tied. the place lemselves enotes a Diminutives denote not only smallness, but also endear, mint commseratwn, or contempt. They follow the render of the substantives from which they are derived, and are formed by the addition of the following Suffixes :-! '• ^DecW^n'^'a'?'^''^ *' substantives of the First and Second nid-Qlua, a little nest, hort-tilus, a Utile garden, riv-alus, a little river, mens-ala, a little table, silv-ala, a little wood, virg-ala, a little twig, caplt-illum, a small head, sax-illum, a small rock, scut-alum, a small shield, 2. oiilufl, oiUa. ojlnm, added to substantives of the Third. Fourth and Fitth Declensions : as, ' from nidus hortus rivus meusa silva virga captit saxum scutum. frater-ctllus, flos-ctilus, versI-cPlus, mater-ctlla, navI-cQla, avi-cflla, re-cula, a little brother, a little flower, a little verse, a poor mother, a small ship, a small bird, a small matter. corpus-cttlum, a small body, munus-cQlum, a small present, retl-ctUum, a little net, from frater flos versus mater navis avis res corpus munus rete. Obs. 1 If a vowel precede the Suffixes iilus, iila, ilium, they become dlus, Ola, olum: as, ' f Ili-61u8, a little son, malle-51u8, a small hammer, flli-51a, a little daughter, llne-51a, a little line, n6g6ti-81um, a little business, ingfini-51um, a little talent. from f llius malleus filia llnea nfigotium inggnium. 11 II II II Obs. 2. If the final vowel of the stem of the primitive is preceded by I, n or r, and in a few other cases, a contraction takes place, and the ter'. mination of the diminutive becomes ellus, ella, cllum, and sometimes, but rarely, tllus, ilia, ilium: as. dcellus, Ubellus, l&pillus, c^tella, anguilia, eKgillum, a little eye, a little book, a little stone, a little chain, a little snake, a little figure, from Sctilus liber l^pis catena anguis signum (Stem, 6c(ilo) II II II II II II II II libro) lapid) catena) angui) signo). Ofis. 3. If the Stem of the primitive ends in c or g, t or d, the diminutives are generally formed by adding Ulus, ilia, iilum : as, rOg-ulus, a petty king, from rex (reg-s) radlc-aia, a little root, „ radix fradics). f3 106 DEEIVATION OP SUBSTANTIVES. §1M. § 184. Patronymics. Patronymics are Greek words, used by the Latin poets whicJi designate a person by a name derived from that of ms father or ancestor. Masculine Patronymics end in : 1. Ides : as, Priam-Ides, a eon of Priamua. 2. Ides: as, Atr-ides, a son of Atreus. ^' ^TsoTo/Mk!-;. ^^' ^^'^^-^^^^^ « ««» of Aeneas; Atlant-iades, Oi,.^^Patronymics in Ides (eiSr,,) are only formed from Proper Names in eui Feminine Patronymics end in : 1. la, Gen. Idis: as, Tantal-is, a daughter of Tantalus. 2. eifl, Oen. eldis: as, Nel-eis, a daughter of Nelem. 3. las, Gen. i&dis: as, Laert-ias, a daughter of Laertes. 4. Ine: as, Neptun-ine, a daughter of Neptunus. 5. dne : as, Acrlsi-one, a daughter of Acrisius. § 185. III. Substantives derived from Adjectives. Substantives derived from Adjectives denote a quality or state, and have the following Suffixes :— ^ 1. ia (/.) : as, favour, madness, wretchedness, prudence. grat-ia, insan-ia, m&fir-ia, prudent-ia, 2. tia (/.) : as, laetl-tia, joy, justr-tia, justice, molll-tia, softness, pigri-tia, sloth, 3. tas(6?en. tatis,/.): as, b6nl-tas, goodness, verl-tas, trttth, crudell-tas, cruelty, atrocl-tas, fierceness, i. tfldo (Gen. tudtois,/.) : as, altl-tudo, height, aegrl-tudo, sickness, fortl-tudo, bravery, simni-tudo, likeness, 5. monia (/.) ; as, sancti-monia, sanctity, castl-monia, t^urltv, acri-monia sharpness. from patus „ insanus „ miser n prudens. from laetus „ Justus „ mollis » piger. from bOnus .t verus crudelis atrox. fo oft If from altus „ aeger „ fortis similis. from sanctus „ castas i> acer. i §187. DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 107 Chapter XXIX.-Derivation op Adjectives. § 186. I. Adjectives derived from Verbs 2. Idu denotes tlis quality expressed by a verb from fi-igeo m&deo tlmoQ valeo. n II II frig-Idus, cold, mad-Idu8, lost, tlm-Idua, jfearful, vaUdus, strong, 4. az denotes a propensity, and generally a faulty one : as aud-ax, daring, from audeo ea-ax, gluttonous, „ gdo 18qu-ax. talkative, „ igq^or vor-ax, voracious, „ yOro. Oba. The following Suffixes are less common : 1. cundus: as, IrS-cundus, angry, V, fa*.i;indu8, eloquent 2. tUus: as, qugr-ttlus, qum-ulom. from Ira-soor » fari ii quSror. S 187. II. Adjectives derived from Substantives of ,^t^o^ii:s::tt''^ «"^«*^^*-- ^ «. add-tion '• *"mbl^t : at "'*'"''' "^' ""^*^^^' ^"* ^^<^' - ugn-eus, woorfew, IiVmim pic-eus pitchy, " i'g"^,. virgln-eus, L^/^Zii.. .'I Sfgof-Ms. 2. Mus or itius denotes the material, or relation to something la^r-fclus, made of bricks, from later trrbun-lcius. relaUr^ to a tHhune, r^onus aedU-Icius, relating to an aedih, ," aedms Oba. 1. aceus has the same meaninir. but is rnm • o» o/c%, from argilla. »"'»*^»» "at is rare, as, argill-nceua, made Oba. 2. Adiectives in Tnina /Ioi^tt.j a.-,—, ^i,, -n r x , th3 .• long, and denotelh; way'fn wS a thinl f- ^^ °' '"^^"^ ^"^''^ kind: as, commentlcius, /J^Xi? ^ originates, and hence itn as, 108 DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. § 187. civis olossigi 8. Ion* denotes belonging or relating to a thing : tw, bell-lcus, relating to war, from bellum civ-IcuB, relating to a citizen, class-Icus, relating to a fleet, Oba. The foUowinff A^ectives in iou« havo I: ttmlciig, friendly, from antTous, front, posticus, hinder, aprlous, sunny. II II II 4. nifl has the same meaning : as, host-Ilis, hostile, serv-ilis, alaviah, puCr-ilis, childish, ttmo, &inor antd post. ttpSrio (t) from hostis servTis puer. II II from fattim •I rex vita. 5. Uia has the same meaning : as, ftt-alis, jutal, reg-alis, kingly, vit-alis, vital, '^«;/Ai!'^'•^'^''^,"^''^^ °' the substantive is preceded by /, the Suffix of the Adjective is ftris (comp. § 181, 9) : as, p8pttl-aris, pertaining to the people, from p8ptllus siUat-aris, salutary, „ sWOs, siilQtis. 6. ioB has the same meaning, and is usually formed from personal names : as, " f •*•« patr-ius, pertaining to a father, from pfttep soror-nis, pertaining to a sister, „ sSror orator-ius, pertaining to an orator, „ orator. 7. Inua has the same meaning, and is found especially in deriva- tions from the names of animals .as, c&n-mus, pertaining to a dog, Squinus, pertaining to a horse, div-inus, pertaining to the gods, 8. gnuB has the same meaning : as, urb-anus, pertaining to a city, font-anus, pertaining to a fountain, mont-anus, pertaining to a mountain. from canis ,1 equus „ divus. from urbs fons, foutis mons, mentis , II II 9. ariua has the same meaning : as, agrarius, pertaining to land, grgg-arius, belonging to a flock, 16gion-anus, belonging to a legion, ^^Ltll2!''^ "'■'""* "° *''*"'' "'''^ ''' *^^ S"®^«« °f Substantives. from ag2r „ grex, grggis l6gio. 10. osns denotes fulness : as, lapld-osus, full of stones, pgricQl-osus, full of dangers, anlm-osus, full of courage. from lapis ,. pgricClum II animus. §188. DBUIVATIOIJ OF ADJECTIVES. 109 "• '^^r'"''^""««*«'^'y thovowela or5.ul.odenote.fhl. %Su'3. -^""^''^^ ""■''* T^«' «'%«'^. from ala ^"^■""«. ;; i^r' - *^^? corn-utus. j ' , , •• auris home, homed, „ comu. § 188. III. Adjectives derived from Proper Names SuffifC" I^n-'T' '^^"^ ^^-^ — of .en b, the Mari-anus, Sull-anus, Gracch-anus, Cicfiron-ianus, from Marius .. Sulla It Gracchus •I Olcfiro. The Suffix Inua is rare : as, Verr-inus (punningly),' from Verres (or verres. a hog). Ob». From Greek names of men we have fh« r„« lous: as, '^*^° ^'^^ Suffixes eufl or iu8 and ^^•''"^x*;^'' fromEptcflrus Piaton-rcus, „ piato. The poets form Adjectives in «« from Roman names • as Romal-eus, from Komttlus. b/Aaiar^^-^ lXe*^r -- "^ tow. 1. enaia: as, Oami-ensis, from Cannae Oom-ensis, „ Comum Sulmon-ensis, „ Sulmo (Sulmon-is). 2. Inus, from names of towns in ia and ium: as. Amer-inus, from Am^ria Caud-mus. „ Caudium. 3. ftnuB^ from names of towns in a and ae. and from some in um Rom-anus. from Roma li)eb-anus. Tlieba-^ TuscOl-anus. ,'; Tuscafum Fuad-anus. „ Fundi. I no DERIVATION OP VERBS. §190. 4, ta, 0«n. Itii, cliiefly from names of towns in num. but sometimen from tbosu in na and nae : as, Arplnaa, from Arpinum Canenos, „ Canena Iluenas, „ FWenao. fiiaVATION OF VERBS. Ill SeoolS'b^lS an^:'^7r^« are . ...lly of the from SubHtait^ve« unci Adject ivorrt;" ' ""^^'^^' •"^"^^' oalvoo, alboo, I am bald, lam white, from calvus nlbu4. S 194. II. VkUBS DEUIVM) FliOM VerRS. rSr^' ^/^y out of ten, from clumo "I'f^ "«. I ask often, riVn °"" "•'"^ .. vSmo, vontimi. Verb : as, ^ ^^ ^'^P^^ ^'^^^''« ^^o terminations of tht ourso, salto, ' >i silio, saltum. Sus'co* j^^Oin to totter, from labo +,,^L • • J^ grow warm, nftlfin trem-isco. I begin to tremble, " SZ obdormi-sco. I fall asleep, ' " aoZia ^ grow old, „ ggngjj^ the «m of the termfnatiou L^ ^ "^ '^''' ""'^ '^^W^S script too. I long to mite. „ acrlbo, Mriptum. OS.. B, .„.,„,r ,. ,„„,, s^,,,„„_ ^,^_^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^^^ _^^^__^^ cant-illa sorb-illn, consnrih i-illo, J warble, i scribble, from canto sorbeo conscribo 112 DEBIVATION OF ADVERBS. §li«6. § 195. Intrans^'tive Verbs of the Second Conjug;-ttior are sometimes derived from T'-ansitive Verbs of the Third Con- jugation, the latter signify ing a momentary act and the former a state : as, jacio, jacSre, to throw, jaceo, jacere, to lie. pendo, pendgro, to hang, to weigh, pendeo, pendere, to he havqing. pano, paigre, to bring forth, paxeo. parere, to he visible, (cando, candSre), "1. . ^ , inoendt , incendgrej**' *^* (^nfire, candeo, candere, to he burning. Chapter XXXI. — Derivation of Adverbs. § 19G. Adverbs in c are derived from Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions, or from Perfect Participles Passive : as, madedte, modestly, from mOdestus pulchre, beautifully, „ pulcher docte, learnedly. doctus. Obs. 1. From bSnus coires bgnS, from mMua comes mSIg, both with the ^nal e short. From vaiWus, strong, comes valde. Obs. 2. Some Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions have Adverbs in ter as ,.ell as in e: as, • dure, durKtSr, severely, firme, firmttdr, firmly, gnave, gnavKter, actively, humane, humanTtSr, courteously, large, largftfir, bounteomly, luciilente, lucfUentgr, splendidly, From vi51entus, vehement, there is only viblentSr ; the form viSlens is never used in prose. from durus „ firmus „ gnavus „ bumunus „ largus „ lucttlentua. § 197. Adverbs in 6 are derived from Adjectives of the First and Second DeclensLns, and from Perfect Participles Passive, and are properly Ablatives Singular : as, falso, falsely, from falsus tuto, safehj, „ tutus crebro, frequently, „ creber. Obs_. Theform in is rare. From some Adjectives come Adverbs both in e and 0, but with a difference of meaning : as, certo, certainly, and certe, at any rate ; vcro. in truth, indeed, and vere, truly. m,^. ^?^ Adverbs in ter are formed from Adjectives of the Third Declension : as. gravI-tCr, ifelici-tSr, heavily, forttmatelji, from gravis §li«6, § 205. COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 113 sapienter, wisely, from siipiens (slipient-a). ffecflg, eosefj/; rgcens, ZafcZ?/; multum, much. § 200. Adverbs in itils are derived from Substantives and Adjectives, and ^Quoie proceeding frov. something: as, coel-Itfls, from heaven, from coelum radic-Itfls. from the roots, „ radix (radic-s). . i.201- ^^verbs in tim are formed from Substantives, Ad jectives, and Verbs, and denote the way or maiiner: as. caterva-tira, in troops, from catena pnva-tim, as a private person, „ privatua sm-tim, immediately, „ sto (stare) pxmc-tim, with the point, „ pungo. §§^^73^^^^'^^'' "^^"""^^ ^"""""^ Numerals are given in § 203. Adverbs derived from Pronouns are given ir: 9 loo. Chapter XXXII.— Composition of Words. § 204. A Compound Word is formed of two or more roots. Ohs. Sometimes a Substantive and Adjective, both of which are declined or a Genitive and the Substantive oti which it derendr, are wS together, but these are not genuine compounds : as, respublica. Gen. rglpubWcae, the commonwealth. jusjurandum, G^ew. jurisjurandi, an oath. s^natus-consultum, „ resolution of the senate. &quae-ductus, « water-channel. § 205. The first part of a compound word may consist of any part of speech ; but a verb is only found in the first part, when facio is in the second : as, firefacio, to make dry. calefacio, to make warm. liquef&cio, to cause to melt. madefUcio, to make wet. patSftlcio, to throw open. OJs. Such apparent compounds as nldlffTco, / hnld a nest, are rather to be referred to an iuteriuediate Adjective : as, nidincus. nest-building. 114 COMPOSITION OF WORDS. §206. § 206. A compound verb, as a general rule, consists only of a preposition and a verb ; but the vowol of the verb usually undergoes the following changes :— 1. Short a is usually changed into short i before one consonant, but sometimes into short e : as, capio, to take, acclpio rf.pio, to seize, arripio patior, to suffer, perpgtior gradior, to vxilk, congiGdior. Ohs. PSrSgo, to complete, perplXceo, to please greatly, and filcio com- pounded with adverbs, as siitisfacio, to satisfy, are exceptions. 2. A before two consonants is usually changed into e: as. carpo, (fe.mno, to pluck, to condemn, to climb, to scatter concerpo condemno conscendo conspergo. scando. spargo, a. A is sometimes changed into u : as, salto, to dance, insulto calco, to tread, conculco quatio, to shake, conctttio. 4. Short e is changed into short i before one consonant : as, Sg6o, to want, indlgeo sgdeo, to sit, insldeo tgneo, to hold, abstineo. Obs. Perlggo, to read tlirough, prael^go, to read to others, rSlego, to read again, are exceptions. 5. The diphthong ae becomes long i: as, caedo, to cut, occldo quaero, to seek, inquiro laedo, to strike, collido. _^ 6. The diphthong au becomes either 6 or u, but in one instance plaudo, to clap the hands, explodo claudo, to shut, conclude audio, to hear, Sbedio. Obs. The changes which the prepositions undergo in composition are mentioned in § 138. ^ ^ ^ § 207. Substantives and Adjectives in composition are usually connected by the vowel i; or the last syllable ol the first word is changed into i: as, pSdIsgquus, a follower on foot, from pes (pgd) and sgquor munttlcus, bountiful, „ munus and facio causldlcus, an advocate, „ causa and dice agrlc(51a, a husbandman, „ agSr and cGlo aqufliftr, a standard-bearer, „ aqufla and f^ro. § 208. The quantity of Verbs in composition is the same as that of the simple verbs : as, fero, affero ; habeo, pro- Wbeo, etc. The only apparent exceptions are mentioned in the Prosody. %L^^'l I H5 ) nicio com- osition are le same PAET II. — SYNTAX § 209. Syntax treats of the relations of words and sen- tences or parts of sentences to eacli other. Chapter XXXIIL— Of Sentences. . j § 220. When two or more Substantives form the joint Subject, the Verb is put in the Plural Number : as, Castor et Pollux ex gquis pugnare vlsi sunt. Castor and Pollux were teen to fight on horseback. — Cic. Vita, mors, divitiae, paupertas, omnes homines vShCmentissime per- mSvent, Life, death, riches, poverty, have very great influence uvon aU people.— Gio. ^ Obs. 1. When the Subject consists of two Singular Substantives which together form but one idea, the Verb is in the Singular : as, senatus popttlusque Romanus intemgit, The setiate and people of Borne are (lit. is) aware. — Cic. Tempus nCcessitasque postiilat. Time and necessily demand. Cic. Obs. 2. Sometimes, when there are two or more subjects, the Verb agrees with the nearest and is understood with the rest : as, OrgetSrTgis fllia et untts e flliis captus est, T!ie daughter of Orgetorix and one of his sons was taken prisoner. — Caes. § 221. When Subjects having a common Predicate are of different Persons, the First is preferred to the Second, and the Second to the Third. For in fact a Subject of ::he First Person and a Subject of the Second or Third Person are together equivalent to a First Person Plural ( = nos) ; while a Subject of the Second Person and a Subject of the Third Person are together equivalent to a Second Person Plural ( = vos) : thus ego et tu, or ego et frater meus, both = nos j while tu et ille, tu et frater, = vos : as. Si tu et Tullia lux nostra valiiUs, ego et suavisslmus CicGro vdlemm. If you and my darling Tullia (= ye) are well, so am I and my sweeten vicero ( — so are we'j.—Cic. t Obs. In Latin the First Person always takes precedence of the Second 6go et rex, the king and 1, literally, I and the king. «, 11 118 CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT. §222. l-f ; at '' p m I r" Nni ) M u-?! ?,x^J'^^ ^' ^ Collective Substantive ( Noun of Multitude "), or a word implying plurality, the Verb 18 sometimes put in the Plural, especially in the poeis ', as, .,.«35!,V^''""^ P«ac«. -^Me novum pia turha Quirinum, Let the pious people offer mcense and propitiate the mw {deity) Quirinus.-Oy. -- ,-^^?ectaia sSggtem magna vis hdmtnum simul immissa corblhim /udere^n TlU'rim, A Urge body of men wadset to ivZc^^n^toTealZ com and empty it from baskets into the Tiber. -Uv, ^ Second Concord. § 223. The Substantive and Adjective. — An Adjective agrees with its Substantive in Gender, Number, and Case : as. Jam pauca ^mtrojUgSra regiae Moles rfilinquent. Ere hng the princely piles ivill leave few acres for the plough.- Hot. Nee te [sllebo] mStuende certd Phoebe sagittd. Nor will I hold my peace of thee, Phoebus: to be dreaded for thne unerring 8haft.~H.0T. Ohs. The rule is the same whether the Adjective is used as an Attribute or a I redicate : as, vir bonus, a good man ; or vfr est bSnus, the man is good. § 224. In like manner, the Perfect Paiiiciple used in forming the Perfect Tenses of the Passive Voice agrees in Gender and Number with the Subject of the Verb : as, Omnium assensu comprdbdta oratio est, The speech was approved by the assent of all. — Lit. ri- y Neglectum Anxiiri praesXdium (est), The garrison at Anxur was not looked after. — Liv. § 225. When an Adjective or Participle is predicated of two or more Subjects at once, it is put in the Plural JS umber. (1.) If the Subjects are persons, though of different genders, the Adjective is Masculine : as, ^^Pater mihi et mater moHui sunt. My father and mother are dead. (2.) If the Subjects are things without life, and of different genders, the Adjective is Neuter : as, SCcundae res Mnores. impgria, vietoriae foriuka sunt, Prosperii, Honours, places of command, victories are accidental.— Cic. §222. §229. CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT. 119 and enjoyment are ImUed together ly a kind ofpartnir,hip.-ui.^^ Ob,^l. Even If the thtog, .re of the ..me Cenacr, the Neuter I. often „„a , LnepS.iruTrt%r.ii';r«s °"^ '-^'^ - '>'"'"-" i;i?^fif'"°^S°'^* *''^ Adjective or Participle of the Pre- ttubje'ra^ ^^"^^ '"^'^^' 0"'''' ^--««^ f- of § 227. Sometimes a predicative Adjective, instead of agreeing m Gender with the Subject, is put in 'the Neuter where m English we should express the word -thing^'as Tristeljus stmUs, Ue wolf is a sorry thing in cattle-stalls. -YiJ ■ __ Jm-pWudo vem est quam dSIor, Bisgra^e is a worse thing than pain. Third Concord. § 228. m Relative and its Antecedent. ~ThQ Eelative agrees with Its Antecedent in Gender, Number, and Person fas! Ego, qui te confirmo, ipse me non possum, I who am encouraainn you, cannot {encourage) myself.— Cic. encouraging „«.S""T-1r?"'*i'^"^'^ sangulnem habet, sine corde esse pStest No animal, which has blood, can he destitute of a heart.— Cic. "" whi^is^'thLlri'l?''"''-'' determined by its relation to its own olau.e, wnicn IS thus treated as a separate sentence : as, ThflnZf'^^ dlKgens agrlcSla, quan^m adsptciet baccam ipse nunquam >,=.!!r''"-~"It^''l ^}^ Relative quarum is governed by the Substantive baccam m the Relative sentence. [Genitive of Possessor, § 265 ] § 229. When the Relative has for its Predicate a Sub- stantive of different gender l.,.m the Antecedent, the - ^. .~^,«?f,j iix gonaex wIlii luu 1 redicate : as, Caesar Gomphos pervenit, quod (not qui) est (^mum Boeotiae Caesar came to Gomphi, which is a toton ofJBoeotia.-Kea. ^°*'^®' 120 THE NOMINATIVE CASE. §250. • X i^^^u ^^* ^ "^^' justam gloriara, qui (not quae) oat fructuB verae virtutis hOnestissimus, riSpadiure, It is characteristic of a worthless mind to despise just glory, which is the most honourable fruit of true virtue.— Cic. § 230. When the Eelative has for its Antecedent a whole proposition, the latter is treated as a Neuter Substantive, and id quod is generally used instead of quod : as, TlraOleon, id quod difficllius pfltatur, multo sftpientius tQlit sScundara quam advorsam fortfinam, Timoleon, a thing which is thought the more difficult, bore prosperity much more wisely than adversity.— -iiep. a', I i Chapter XXXV.— The Nominative Case. ^ § 231. The Nominative Case is used to denote the Sub- ject of a Sentence : as, _ .Ego reges ejeci, vos t^rannoa introducitis, I expelled Icings, ye are onngmg in despots.— Auct ad Her. See also § 219. Obs. Only in the case of the Infinitive Mood, in the Obltqua oratio, the Subject 18 in the Accusative. § 232. The Nominative is also used to denote the Predi- cate after the following Verbs : — _ (1.) Verbs which signify to be or to become: as, sum, ex- isto, fio, evado (to issue, turn out) nascor (to be bom), etc. (2.) Verbs which denote a state or mode of existence : as maneo (to remain), duro (to endure), etc. ' (3.) Passive Verbs of naming, making, appointing: as, nommor, dicor, appellor [also audio, in sense of to be called j ; creor, flo, designer, instituor, etc. (4.) Verbs signifying to seem or be thought: as videor, habeor, existimor, dacor, etc. : as, (1.) Nemo rSpente fit turpisstmus, No one becomes utterly base all at once, — Juv. Nemo nascKtur dives, No one is bom rich.— Sen. en/:ie-£'*^^"^^ integrae manebant, The fortifications remained 1 • (•^•^^_^5"^a Pompilius rex creatus est, Numa Fompilius was made king. — Eiutr. ^ Justttia erga deos reltgio dicttur, Justice towards the gods is called religion.— Cic. ' y " "• (4.^ satis altttudo muri exstructa videbatur, The height of the wall seemed sufficiently raised. — Nep. In rebus angustis animosus et fortis appare, In trying circum- stances, shoio thyself courageous and manly.— Hoi. k- §336. THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 121 Chapter XXXVI—The Accusative Case. 1. Accusative of the Object. Acta*' ^^ Accusative denotes the Direct Object of an Transitive Verbs of all kinds, both Active and Deponent govern the Accusative : as, -^^ponent. Deus mundum aedlfXcavit, God built the world -Cic shadow'-a^^'^ ^^""^"^"^ "^^"^ *^«"""''' ^'^^ ^^^'^^^ ^'^rtue like a living being, the Preposition a or a. is pXe^: "a«f rg ^ter pt^^^^^^^^^^ ne master praues the boy, becomes in the Passive, puer a nS ^ Clt tur, J'.^e 6oy ts praised by the master. "».«kihuo lauiia- • ^^"•» -^""y M/e« by men /or eminent fortune.) Non parce-^wr liibori, iaSowr sAo« not be spared.— Cio fLit TOp« shall be no sparing for labour.) {hit., There ^^lll'Z^^ principal oi,^are»< exceptions to the Government of an Accusa tive by Transitive Verbs will be found at § 291. Accusa- § m. CogmteAccusative.-hximn^iiivQ Verbs are some- times followed by an Accusative of cognate or kindred sense to them:.elves : as, ij^iuuieu Hac D — dream — "Lu Verissimum Obs. This coi employed. ^ •rum somniam aomnium, T.ds night I dreamt a strange ^umjurare. To swear a most true oath.~Cic. >a is especiaUy used when an Attributive Adjective is § 236 Other intransitive Verbs often govern an Accu- sative by virtue of some transitive meaning impliedTn them. This IS often the case with those verbs w£ch de^ note a sMe of mind, like Iflgeo, / mourn, Itigeo^ ouid 7 murnon account of something ; horreo, / shudder, Lmo Im/ 1 shudder at something, &g. : as, aiiquid, Amore mimm depMre, To be dying of love for some one.-Plaut ContrSmSre hastam. To tremUe at the lance.~\hg. SM. L. G. Q 122 THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. §338 § 2 18. All lutruusitive verba of motion compounded with tho riepoKitUmM circum, per, praeter, trans, Bttper, and subter, become TiunsitiveH, and govern an Accusative : as, TiiiiotliouH Peltlpoum'Hum circumvSlietn Ltlcontam pCpOlatus cat, Tmolheua suiliug round Pdoponnetua, laid tcaste Laconia. — Nop. liauutbul Alpe» cum excrcltu tran$iit, Hannibal crossed the Alps with an ariny. — Nop. § 2;{9. Maiii/ Intransitive verbs of motion compounded with the Prepositions ad and in, and some verbs compounded with ante, con, ^x, and prae, become Transitives, and govern iiii Accusative : as, NuvtiS Genuain uccessHmnt, The ships reached Genoa. — Liv. .-■ Urbem iuvuduut, They fall upon the city.— Virg. Nomlneni couveni, I have met no one. — Cic. SocietCitem colre, To form a partnership^ . — Cic. Mddum cxcedSre, To exceed the limit. — Cic. Qiuuitum Gnlli virtute cUta^ron mortHles pmestdrent. How much the Gauls surpassed the rest of mankind in valmir. — Liv. Nemo eum in amicltiii antecessit, no one excelled him infn'mdship — Nc-p. ^' §241. These five Impersonal Verbs, pttdet, it shameth ; taedet, U wcaneih ; poenitet, it rcpenteth ; piget, it grieveth ; and miseret, it pitieth (affects with pity) ; take an Accusative of the Person ichom the feeling affects. The object of the feeling is put in the Genitive (see § 282) : as, JfJ pi get stultltiao meae, I am vexed at my folly. — Cic. Tlm5thei post mortem pSpulum judlcii sQi poenttuit. After the death of Tiinotheus the people repented of their judgment. § 242. In like manner dgcet, it is becoming, and dgdgcet, it is unheconiiiig, take an Accusative of the Person : as, Omtoiem miulmeddcet Lrasci, It very ill becomes a speaker to lose his temper. — Cic. Ohs.^ In like manner the Impersonala juvat, it delights; latet, fallit, fugit, praeterit, it escapes [notice) ; Sportet, it behoves, take an Accu- Bative of the Person. 2. Double Accusative. § 243. Verbs of teaching and concealing take a double Accusative after then^.— one of the thing and another of the person : as, doceo, / teach (with its compounds) ; celo, / conceal, hide from : as, Quis musieam dScuit Epamlmndam, Who taught Epamtnondas name ? — Nep. ^ §338 ided with md subter, I'llatua est. Nop. d ths Alp$ ipounded apounded d govern 1. 5 246. THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 123 9 much iite iendehip. — shameth ; 'eth; and 7e of the eeling is r the death IScet, it is to lose his tet, fallit, 3 an Accu- double ather of >) ; celo, minondas Non oelayi te Krmonem hOmlnum, I ham not heptfrmn you the men'$ Oh. Aoewative after a Pauive Verb. When a Verb of teaching, &o. in turned into tho PuBsive (see § 234, Oba. 1), the thing taught may BtiU remain in tho Accusative : as, L. Marcius omnei mllltiae artea Cdootus fufirat, Lucius Marciua had been taught all Che arts of war.— Llr. § 244. Sorao verbs ^ of asking, entreating, and (lemandiiK/ take a double AccuHative after them — one of tho thing and another of the person : as, oro, / entreat, r6go, / ask or entreat ; and posco, reposco, fl&glto. J demand : as, Legati Verrem aXmiilaorum Cdrfiris rSposcunt, The envoys dematid back from Verrem the statue of Ceres.— Cic. Caesar frumentum Aeduos flagltabat, Caesar hept demanding com of the Aedui. — Caes. Oba. When a verb of asking, &c. is turned into the Passive, the thing may still remain in the Accusative : as, Primus rSgatus est aententiam, Ee wasjirat aakcdfor hia opinion. — Sail. § 245. Factitive Accusative. — Verbs signifying to name, to make or appoint, to reckon or esteem, and the like, take after them a double Accusative — one of the Object and the other of the Predicate to that object : as, Romtilus urbem ox nomino suo Bomam {Fact Ace.) vocuvit, Bomulus called the city Borne from his own name. — Eutr. ■ Contempsit Slcalos, non dusit (eos) homines {Fact. Ace), He de- spised the Sicilians ; he did not take them for human beings. — Cic. Ancum Martium regem {Fact. Ace.) pOpOlus creavit, The people made Anciis Martins king. — Liv. Obs. The Factitive Accusative becomes a Predicative Nominative after the Passive of the above verbs : see § 232. § 246. Transitive Verbs compcnnded with trans and circum, as transjicio, trar dtico, transporto, to carry across, and circumduco, to lead around, take after them a double Accusative, one of the person, and the other of the thing crossed: as, Agesflaus Hellespontum capias trajecit, Agesilaus carried his troops across the Hellespont. — Nep. Pompeius BoscHlum omnia sua praesidia circumduxit, Pompeius led Roscillus round all his entrenchments,— Caes. Oba. In the Passive one of the two Accusatives remains : as, M^jor multltudo Germandrum RhUnum trimH6,\\c!{t\ir.^ A greater tnultilxida of Germans u carried across the Mhine. — Caes. 02 I21 ii i! THE ACCUSATIVE CA«E §247. 3. Accusative of Motion towards. ^ § 247. Names of Towns and small Islands are used in the Accusative without a Preposition after Verbs sigui- f}-ing Motion towards. For examples, see § 259 in the Ap- pendix on the Construction of names of Towns. § 248. Similarly the Accusative is used after many Pro- positions signifying motion towards, proximity , or relation to • as, ad, in for into, inter, pr6p8, &o. See §§ 135, 137. 4. Accusative of Time or Space. § 249. Duration of Time and Extent of Space are put in the Accusative, answering to the questions— ^au; louq ? How far? How high? How deep? How broad? How thick?' &», ^ Quaedoin bestiOlae unum diem vivunt, Some insects live bat one day. Pericles quadraginia anno» praefuit Athenis, Periclee governed Athens for forty years.— Cic. Pddera e villa adhuc egressi non eOmus, Aa yet we have not stirred one foot from the {country) house.— Cic. Ciimpus Marathon ab Atlienis circller millia paasuum decern ftbest Ifie plain {of) Marathon is distant from Athens about ten thousand paces. — Nep. Millies agffCrem latum pSdes trScentos triginta. altum pgdes octoqinta M^rr— CacT '''"'^^''^''^^^ « ^'"^"'^ 330 fed broad and 80 c^'Sx"* *^® ^^^' ^'"*' "^'"*' *^® Genitive would have been used : see § 274. J 5. Accusative in Exclamations. § 250. The Accusative is used in exclamations, either with or without an Interjection : as, this^e/^^-G?c'^ ^^^° ^""^^ ''°'' vidCrim, My blindness not to have seen O vim maximam erroris, the enormous power of error I— Cic. Eheu wemMrum, hapless me! -oTr '^^^''"^ ^**^"^ hSmlnum f idem I In the name of gods and Tnen ! ^w quatuor dras, Lo, four altars.-Yiig. Obs. 1. But en aud ecce are quite as frequently found with the Nominative • as Ecce tme literae (sc. mnt) de Varrone, There is your letter about Farrol Obi. 2. Hei and vae are construed with the Dative : w, Vae victis. Wnp. t.n thf. r.nnniiffoH T St. Hei mTsgro mihi. Woe to wretched me. Ter. 5 2*7. ) aro ii8ed erbH sigiii- u the Ap- many Pre- relation to : 36 are put Bow h\i(j ^ ' thick?' an, but one day. imed Athene 'e not Htirred i5cem ftjjest, !« thousand let octogintu oad and 80 been used : Qs, either have seen -Cic. and men ! Inative: as, bout Varrot 5 2SS. THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 325 6. Accusative of Closer Definition. § 251. The Accusative is used, espooiully by tlio I'ootH . Vorbe I'articiplos, and Adjectivos, tc. indicate the part ot the Subject specially referred to : as, mmMhA advermm fSmur grJlvItcr ictus. cCcIdit, Ilannihal Ml merely wounded m the fore part of the thigh.— Liv. Equu8 trCmit artus, The horse trembles in its Z/mfts.— Virg. " Fcmlnuo nfulue brdchia ot Vicertot, Womn loiUi both the lower ami upper part of the arm bare.—-To.o. Hxviiecim pedes. With the feet pierced.— WiYg. " — ' ' Oba. In proso, tho Ablative is more grencrally used : as, Pi^dlbus acger, Diseaied in the feet.— Cic. Captl dcaiia talpae, Moles maimed in the eyes (i.e. 6/md).— Virg. 7. Greek Accusative. §252. Sometimes, by a Greek idiom, a Passive Verb is used in a middle .sense, and made to govern an Accusative : as, induor, amicior, / clothe, put on myself; exuor, / strip of (from myself) ; cingor, aocingor, / gird on myself; and tlie like : as, Inutllo femm cingUur, Ue girds on the bootless steel— Txrg. Androgoi guleam induXtur, Ho puts on the helmet of Androgens.— 8. Other Uses of the Accusative. § 253. The Neuters of some Pronouns (id, hoc, Ulud, Idem, &c.), and of Adjectives implying number (unum, multa! pauca, &c.), are frequently used with verbs which require a different constraction in the case of other words : as, Idem gloriari. To maJce the same boast. — Cic. Onmes mflligrea eudem stadent, All women have the same inclina- tions. — Ter. Id opgram do, I strive after this. — Ter. Utrumque laetor, I rejoice at both things.—Cic. Disclptilos id Unum mOneo, I remind pupils of this one thing.— Cic. Saepe non audimus ea, quae ab natura mdnemur, We often do not Uar those things, which we are reminded by nature. — Cic. Ohs. 1 . Tliis Accusative may also be used with the Passive, as in the last example. Ohs. 2. The same construction is used even -without verba ; a^ Id tempOrls, At that Hme. — Cic. Homo id aetatis, A man of that age.— Cic. i- 'I Hi ::| 126 THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. § 2M. ^ § 254. The Accusative is used adverbially in the expres- sions magnam (maximam) partem, for the most part; vicem. on account of ; secus, sex ; cetera, in other respects : as, JmvirmxXmam partem lacte atque pScore vivunt. TJie Suevifor the most part live on milk and cattle.—Cio. ^<*uv,. jvr ins Tuam vicem saepe dSleo. I of ten grieve on your accoimt.-Cic. LibCronim cUpltum vXrlle sScus ad dgcem millia capta Ten thoumnd free persons of the male sex were taketi.-Liy. t/iousand Vir cetera egrSgius, A man illustrious in other respects.— Uy. T I '^?.^' ^? *^® construction of the Accusative Case and Infinitive Mood, see § 507. Appexdix ojt the Constkuction op the Names of Towns. § 256. It has been thought advisable to place together all the rules for the construction of the names of towns 1. Answer to the Question Where ? I "^'^\/.^^°n^^^ ^^ *^® question Where ? names of towns and small islands are put in the Genitive, if the Substantive be of the First or Second Declension and Singular- in all other cases in the Ablative without a prepositTon : is, ifo-mae Consftles. Ath^nis Archontes, Carthdgine Suffetes. sive iu- CarLT^T^' creabantur, At Borne Gonsuh, at Athens ArcZV at Carthage Suffetes, or judges, were elected annually. ~mp. mare Romam 5mo, When at Tivoli I am in love with Ernie -Hor Tliehis, Argis, Ulubris, At Tliehes, Argos (Argi), Uluhrae.—Ror ^^DiQnysius CSrinthi pu6ros docebat, Dionysius taught hoys at Corinth. Obs. It if probable, however, that these cases were originally Locatives a rL'fh. w ^rf '*• ^'^ ' '^ '''' '^'^^"^^'■- ™« accents for the fom TJ\l\ ^^"If/ion, which was originally ai, for the form i in Z § 258 After the same manner are used the following Substantives : dSmi, at home; hiimi, on the ground; rflre, more Irequently ruri, in the country ; militiae. belU. in thp. md s\a Vir mmi non solum sed etiara R6mae clarns. A man famnuR not only at home {in his own country) hit also ai Rome.-Li^ ^ Cic. ;lie expres- ; vicem, on Suevi/or the -Cic. Ten thousand -Liv. Case and Towns. ' together of towns IS ]V?iere ? of towns bstantive ular ; in m: as, s, sive ju- irchons, at tie. — Hor. -Hor. at Corinth. Locatives, a or the form rm i in the i, ruri in the Ablative, in ure, in the bllowing ire, more §261, THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 127 Non eadem ddmi quae milUiae fortuna erat plebi RGmanae, The Roman comttmia had not Hie same good fortune at home as in the field ~ Liv. •' TadSmi 6eZZ«que fortissimus, A man, most valiant at home and in the field.— Yell. Forto evenit ut rtiri(orruie) esaemus, It so happened that ice tvere \n the country. — Cic. Obs. Bomi is also used with meae, tuae, suae, nostrae, vestrae, and alienne; but if any other Adjective or a Possessive Substantive is used with it, the preposition in is more common, as in ilia domo ; in ddmo puhlica : in ddmo Caestiris. 2. Answer to the Question Whither .3 § 259. In answer to the question Whither ? names of towns and small islands are put in the Accusative without a preposition : as, Carius primus glgphantoa quatuor Rom^am duxit, Curius first hrouahi four elephants to Rome. — Eutr. Pau^niam cum classe communi Cyprum atque Hellespontum mise- runt, 1 hey sent Pausanias loith the combined fleet to Cyprus and the Hdlespont. — Nep. . Ohs. 1. The poets use the same construction with the names of countries, and Substantives generally : as, Itaiiam venit, To Italy he came. — Virg. '*!i^irZ"™Tr.ZII"^^ Verba refers aures non pervenientia nostras, Words thou repeatest tvhick reach not to our ears. — Ov. § 260. The Accusatives domum, home ; and rus, to the coun- try, have the same construction as Names of Towns : as, Sfimel egressi, nunquam domum rgvertere, Having once gone abroad^ they never returned home. — Oic. Ego rus ibo, atque Ibi manebo, I loill go into the countrti and remain aiere.—Tex. 3, Answer to the Question Whence 9 §261. In answer to the question Whence? names oi" towns and small islands are put in the Ablative without a preposition : as, DiCnysius Platouem Athenis arcessivit, Dionysiiis sent for Plato from Athens. — Nep. Demaratus, Tarqulnii regis pater, Tarqutnios Cdrintho fugit, Dema- ratus iJie father of King Tarquinius fled from Corinth to Tarquinii.-^ Oic. amous not 128 THE GENITIVE CASE. §262. ii r Chapter XXXVII.— The Genitive. §262 The Genitive Case denotes the dependence of a Substantive (or Pronoun) upon another word, which is generally a Substantive or Adjective, but sometimes a Verb ^*L,?n.?r"r' T'"' «"gi«a»y to have denoted origin, in EneUsh /ro » or of: it can. however, very seldom be translated by/^om, a meaS which IS expressed by the Ablative. ' ™^*"i"» A. Genitive after Substantives. § 263. General Hule.-The Genitive is used to denote the dependence of any one Substantive upon another: as, Bellum Pyrrhi. The war of or loith Pyrrhm. Simalatio amicltiae. The pretence of friendship. Navis auri, A ship of i.e. laden with, gold. ^But a ship [mad^2 of gold would be navis aurea or navis ex auro facta.) § 264. Hence the Genitive depends upon causa, gratia. erg6. DSlores susclpiuntur majorum dSldrum effugiendorum eratia Suffer, ingsare subrmtted to for the sake of avoiding greater suferfngs!-(Sf Si quid contra alias leses hiijus legis ergo factum est If amininn has been done against other Uws for the sake of thisUw. ^ ^ ^ Obs. 1. Instead of the Genitive of the Personal Pronoun, the Possessive Pro. Instar montis gquus, A horse like a mountain.—Virg tkT:ii "«r4s?-cif °~"'' ^^"'^ ^''^^ "' - -^ ''^--. --'* 1. Possessive Genitive, or Genitive of the Possessor. § 265. The Genitive denotes the Possessor, or the person or thing, whereto anything belongs :— Graves Cycldpum off tcinae, 27ie heavy forges of the Cyclops.-Rox In umbrosis milcmis oris, In the shady regions of Eelicon.-Uor. § 266. The Possessive Genitive is freqiiently used after §262. E. idence of a , which is nes a Verb. in, in English '•offj, a meaning §270. THE GENITIVE CASF 129 the verb sum, when in English the word properf,i/ (hchminq to), duty, mark, characteristic, or the like, is expressed :— ' Omnia mntmctdris. All things are {the propeHy) of ilie conqueror (i. e. belong to the conqueror).— Liv. '' ^ i>J J -/ «=ror mttum est dQci parere, It is {the duty) of soldiers to obey the general. Nfliil est tarn angasti anlmi quam amare divitias, Nothinq is (the eharactensttc) of so petty a mind as the love of riches.— Gic. Cuiusvis hSmlnis est errare. It is {tJtepart) of any man to err.— Cic. Oha. This construction is not admissible in the case of the Personal Pronouns • thus we must say, meum est, it U mine or my duty ; tuum est, it u, thine or thy duty; not mei, tui est. denote the ': as. auro facta.) P'atia. erg6, VQ usually inim causa, ires.— Gic. itia, Suffer' 18.— Cic. If anything issessive Pro- e ; tua caus^ table inst&ri nnion, worth tssessor. e person 8. — Hor. I. — Hor. jed after 2. Partitive Genitive. § 269. The Genitive is used after Substantives, to denote the wbole whereof a part is taken : as, Magna vis auri, A great quantity of gold.— Cic. M6dius trtttci, A peck of wheat.— Cic. Multaque pava met vitabit Llbltinam, And an ample part of me mcul evade the tomb. — Hor. ^ ^ j ^ § 270. The Partitive Genitive is often found after the Neuter of Adjectives and Adjective Pronouns used sub- stantively. These Adjectives are : tantum, quantum, ailquantum, multum, plus, plurlmum, nihil,* minrls, minimum, dimldium, paullum, rgllquum. * Nihil is however always a Substantive. The Pronouns are : hoc, Idem, illud, id, quidquam, aliquod, and quid. They are used as Substantives only in the Nominative and Accusative, and must not depend upon Prepositions : as, Plus virium. More of strength. — Sen. Quidquam ndvi. Anything new. — Cic. Nihil humanarum rerum. No human affairs. — Cic. Quantum incrementi Nilus capit, tantum spei in annum est. So much rise as the Nile undergoes, just so much hope is therefor the harvest.— Sen '^■wftta T^.- Obs. But Adjectives of the Third DeclenRinn cannot be used &s Rnhst^ in the Genitive : hence we have aitquid difflcUe, something difficult ; allqu^d dilficllius, something more difficult. G3 130 THE GENITIVE CASE. / y §271 §271. The Partitive Genitive is also found after Adverbs ot Quantity* Place, or 2me, used Substantively : as, o/tSadm-Sau''*^'*^^**^'*"^^^''""^' ■^^^^y<'/^«2"ence, little enough Ublnam gentium "1 mi . „ , , Ubi terrdrum / ^"^*'* *« ^^« «',„♦ •. usually expressed by an Infinitive word or clause Substantive, but is D. Exceptional Uses of the Genitive. § 284. The GeAJtive is occasionally used after Verbs ,w/^?f p'^^'i'^.^'P"'^'^''^^ ^^ Removal; whether ac-cord- mg to the Greek idiom, or by virtue of the original meanino: of the Case (see § 262, Obs.) : as, ^ ..Pf^^J"^ ^^^1^""^ *^^de«^ qugrelarum. Cease at lenath from nnr...... S(51utu9 opSmm, Meleased from toil— Hot 134 the dative cass. Chapter XXXVIIL— The Dative. §287 § 287. The Dative may usually be translated by the Prepositions to or for, in English. It denotes the Remoter Object, as distinguished from the Immediate Object; the latter being put in the Accusative (see § 234) : as, A^opo quidam lapldem impegSrat, Apersm had cast a stmeat Aesop.— Oba. Here the immediate object of the action is the stone (lapldem) which ia catt ; while the Dative Aetopo denotes the remoter olyect, or the person to whom the action has reference. A. Dative after Verbs. 1. Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage. (Ddtivus Commddi or Irvcomm^du) § 288. The Dative may be used after any kind of Verb soever, to signify /or, /or the good of: as, DSmus dSmlnia aedlflcatur, non murihus, A house ia huilt for its owners, not for the mice. — Cic. Non schdlae sed vitae disclmus, We learn not fm- the school, but for hfe.— Sen. ■' Non solum nb\m divltes esse v61iimu6, We wish not to he rich for our- selves only. — Cic. Oba. 1. When for signifies in defence of, in behalf of, pro must be used : as, m8ri pro patria, to die for one's country; dlc6-e pro fillquo, to speak for any one (i. e. in behalf of any one) . Oba. 2. The Dativus Conunodi is also used after Adjectives : see § 298. § 289. Hence some Intransitive verbs, which usually do not govern any case, are constructed with a Dative to ex- press that the action is done with reference to something or somebody. Thus vaco, to be free, signifies vnth the Dative to have leisure for a thing, to devote oneself to it ; niibo, to cover or veil, signifies with the Dative, in reference to a woman, to cover herself or put on the veil for a man, hence to marry ; supplico, to be a suppliant, signifies with the Dative to supplicate, to implore a person : as, PMUfsffphiae semper vaco, I always find leisure to study philosophy. V6nus nupsit Vulcano, Venus married Vulcan.— do. Caesari pro te llbentisslme suppWcabo, I will most willingly mppli' cat* Caesar for you. — Cic. Oba, Of course nUbo is used only of a woman marryin^g. §287 §291. THE DATIVE CASE. 135 2 Dativus Ethicus. § 290. Sometimes the Dative (especially in the case of the Personal Pronouns mihi, tibi, siln, nobis, vohis) is used to signify that the matter spoken of is regarded with interest (>]0oc) by some person : as, Quid mlU Celsus ttgit, How does my friend Celmsf—llor. Hie Marius vgniet tlbi Origlne parva, Here shall come your Marim of stock obscure. — Sil. ObB. The Dativus Ethicus is a more delicate shade of the Dativun Commodi. 3. Dative after various Verbs. § 291. The following verbs, apparently transitive, govern a Dative, which in many cases is the Dativus Commodi or Incommodi : 1 . To assist : subvenio, succurro, auxilior. 2. To resist, oppose: resisto, adversor, obnitor, renitor, repugno, obsum, &c. 3. To favour, study (be devoted to) : faveo, indulge©, studeo. 4. To envy, be jealous of: invideo, aemiilor (see Obs. 4). 6. To please : placeo, arrideo. 6. To serve, obey, bemfit : pareo, obedio, obtempero, servio, prosum. 7. To trust or distrust : credo, fido, confido, diffido. 8. To spare, refrain from : parco, tempero. 9. To advise, persuade : suadeo, persuadeo. 10. To flatter : adulor, assentor, blandior. 11. To cure: medeor, medioor. 12. To pardon : ignosco. 13. To congratulate : gratulor. 14. To revile : maledico, obtrecto, convicior. 15. To be angry : irascor, succenseo. 16. To prn'ect : patrocmor. 17. To command: impero, imperito, praecipio, and some, times dominor, moderor, tempero. With some others. HSmlnes hSmrnthm plurlmum et promnt et ohmni. Mm very greatly benefit and harm their fellow-men,.— KjiG. Liber is est existlmandus, qui nuUi turpttudtni servit. That man should he deemed a freeman who is in bondage to no disqraceful passion..— Cic. . J I 136 THE DATIVE CASE, §391. .««?°"/^'^'"'* ^"' commSdi causa, ndcere alleri. It is mrmq to miurs another for one s own adva7itage.—CiG. ^ ^njun DemosthCnos ejus ipsius artis. cui atSdebat, prlmam lltCram non batur. Antiochua promised to spare neither expense, labour, mr peril! Medici toto corp5re curando, mMmae Ctiam parti medentur ^it!^. ^' ''""''"^ '''' ""''''' '^'^'' ^""y^ "^'^ «^« vT:mSi^rXrt Prabus invXdM nemlni, The good man envies no me.-Cic verf^ilX-Gi:^' ^'''^''''^' "^^'^'^''^ ^Vi<^^ ^«'^W P^a^ natSSi^^So."^"^ ^' ""''*""'^"* ''^^^""'■"' ^'^ '^'^ <^^ aU peoples and Mmrdri dnXmo et ordtioni cum sis iratus, To govern temver ami tongue when you are angry. -Gic. y^vtrn lemver and Obs. 1. The Passives of these ve-bs can be used only imnersonallv • no «,Yi,i invWStur, / am envied. See § 234, Obs. 2 impersonally . as, mYhi Oba. 2. Jfivo and adjttvo, I assist, always govern the Accusative : as, me^'^lrFlZZZ'c^r^ ''^'^""" ^'^'"' ^'^ "'" ''"^ ^-««^ ^ ^"'P ■ 'tcUlvriidtrtL^tSe^k'^^^^^^^^ "^""-' ^- --«-« ^^« ^^Acctattv^f ''"' ^ '"'"" ""^ *° '^■"'^' ^"^'''^' ^« ^^^^y« f«»«^«d ^y «n memL«.-Ner^"''" "'"'''"^ ''*''''' ^''" /«"^.V / «m m„;a«., ^,«. 06». 5. Mbeo, rtgo, and ^ttJerno are aly^P.ya followed by the Accasative : as ^n^*wiSo\r^'''''^'''*^"''"'"' ^ "'^^''' ^^^ '•'''''' i^y favourite Sperare nos ^uvnXaijt^bent, Our friends hid us hopc—Cic. ''VcJZ:Zt:t,^r.s':'''''''' ^-'^^^^^.-ordmgas'theygoven, th« Haec nobis conveniunt, '1 ,. -.a things agree with us. Convenire aliquem, To have an interview with any one. Metuo, tKmeo te, I fear you. ^T^^\ I am apprehensive for yet , Consiilo te, / consult you. tibi, I consult for your interests. Frospfcio, and provWeo te, I see you at a distance. •~ ■ ■ tibi, I consult for your interests. caveo te or a te, I am on my guard against you. tibi, I am concerned for your cafety. TempSro, mSdgror aliquid, to rp/ttilats, arranrn, °"^i' irae, &o., to set bounds to, to check, restiaiv. § 291. 7 to injure tSram non of the very m polhce- yr peril. — mgdentur, 'xllest part id Phaedo Who op- it We are '■opleiand nver and •' as, mThi 18, ly to help stimes the 'ed by an ting Ago- tire: as, favourite ivern the §294. THE DATIVE CASE. 137 >aiv^ 4. Dative after Verbs compounded with Prepositions, § 292. Verbs compounded with the Prepositions ad, aute, con, in and inter ob, post, prae, sub and super govern the Dative, when the Preposition retains its original force in reference to an object. Transitive verbs -have also an Accusative case in addition : as, Tu mthi terrain in-jice, Fling thou eaHh on me {my corr«/>«o oi.ky+» "»ymi» het u.i always so live as to bekexe that we must render up an aceoKnt — Cic. I. 188 THE DATIVE CASE. 6. Dative after Impersonal Verbs. ifSWA. «;ic^^^' '^'?^®/!fP«^««nal Verbs licet, it is lawful; llUt, it pleases ; exp«dit, it is expedient, govern the Dative : as, Ltcet nemlni ducfire exorcltura contra nnfrii.TTi T* ,„ ^ * t / > i. any man to lead an anny against hisZ,/ry~^,o ^""^''^ ^'^ ^Llcuit eB«e Themis. ' i 6m,o, It «,« allowed ThemUtocles to be inactive. _Illi« timidis et ignavis Hcet e.«, /< <, for them to b, timid and cowardly. 7. Dative with the Verb Sum. m* est inju8ta noverca. I have an unjust stepmother.-Yhs Troja huio Idco nomeii oat. This place has the name Troy. -Liy. Ohi. When, as In the last example, a name is snoclflcd after fho ™,k or any similar Verb, it is usually Attracted into tfe Dative al as '"" namlZ' 4^^^'^''^° cognomen ex virtate fuit, Scipio, who had 'the sur. name of Afrtcanua on account of his valour.— Sail. f.lnL^'^lT^^'r^tl """"■" ^^'•at 7J«,«rfm, dgcertavere, They fought in the plains which have the name {are called) Haudii.—Vell. 8. Double Dative. ^ tt7ugr^eTi^':^:£-S^^^ ''''''^' ^ *^«^'-« ^"^ ^/^- ^«- Cm bSno fuit, For whose advantage was it ?— Oic. Obs. The Dative of result is also used without a Dative' of the Person • as «/Sro?/X„.-Si! ^^^^''■'"■' ""^ ''' *^ ^eemthatcircumstanJe a Magtw ddio esse apud aWquem. 7b A« /i« nA.w -^ .«*--, i..^. , , ... I. "ul ; llbet, it : as, >< ^omj/mZ /or that which it the Infinitive to be inactive, and oowardly. as equi- irg. — Liv. the Tcrb esse : an, '•'CJ'':? the aur- 'ought in the §29?. THE DATIVE CASE. 189 ommodi, ied with come ; to atification tften turtis ^amanias, Nep. some me ion : as, matance a 'trrid mih I B. Dativk AFTKri ADVKuns A.vp Adjkctivj;s. iLl\^{ ^\ ^,f'^X (in many cases a DativuR Commodi, 8 288) 18 iiHod after the following clasHcs of Adjectives :- 1. Of Utility: fitllis, commSdns, fructndsns, &c. 2. Of Unprojitablemss or injury : Inntilis, noxius. 4. Of Unfitness : inoommSdus, inconveniens. 6. Of Acceptahkness : gratus, juoundns. cfirus. 6. Of Displeasure : ingrfitus, injucundn«. fldus^*^^'^'"'^^'''^''''' ^""'Snus, amicus, bgnevSlus, fidSlis; 8. Of Hostility : Mmiom, T^emiciosna, mSlevolus, malig- nus, mSlestus, Iratus, infestus. ^ 9. Of Similarity and dissimilarity : similis, dissimilis. 10. Of Equality and inequality: aeqiiulis, maequalis. 11. Of Proximity : finitimus, vicinuB, piopinquuH. ^ Patoiae sSlum omnriw c5n,m est, m ,ort „/ „„, ,ounlry i, dear to Homo alieniBBrinua miTi!, ^ man mwi nnfrimdly to me -Cic /»r Srr4tl« p-pr^''^ ""' ^="- ^■"' <■" »»' -« <-■« ™ ^*LV//°™^ °- -^^'^ Adjectives are used as Substantives, nmTcus Mmiem GenSve"' """"' '"■*^*"^""^' *"' ^"'^ "^^^ ^^^ co;8truc5 wuTS Ois. 2 ^^«i, and dt.^mm, are quite as often found with the Genitive : a«, Decern slfmnes mstdris, Ten men the like of Nestor.-Qic Iinpu cives, tui disstoillKmi. Impiom citizens most unlike yourself. -d^ nl'v^L^?""*'''^ denoting /?<«eM or utility may take, in addition to th Dative as above, an Accusative of the purpose with ad: ^/''°'"°" ^ *•» xf «"«i:!l '^ "■'* P^*""*"^* (""*»■«) XenSphontis libri sunt. The works a. Xmophon are very useful (to •«) for many purposes.^Cic. ^ 140 THE ABLATIVE CASE. § 302. Chapter XXXIX.— The Ablative. denotes,* ^^^ ^^^**i^« Jias two leading significations : it (A.) Separation from. . (B.) Various Conditions of an action : as, manner, cause instrument, time, place, attendant circumstances. ' It is usually expressed in English by the help of the Prepositions /rom, hy, with, in : as, ^ Trojae venit ab oris, He came from, the coasts of Troy.—Yirg. Fato prCfagus, An exile by destiny.— Virg. of S^^y^^^^ asperrlma belli. Carthage, most fierce in the pursuiU 1. Ablative of Separation. \.J\?^%^'''^ a Plac^ or Person is put in the Ablative both wjtk and without a Preposition. § 304. Names of Towns and small Islands are put in the AWative without a Preposition, to denote Motion from. See § 305. All Prepositions denoting Motion or Absence fr&m t:. "e:'§ri36,f/7/*"' ^'^ '^"^^^^^^ "^*^ *^^ ^^i- § 306. The Ablative of Separation is found with Verbs signitymg to separate, remove, deliver from; but more fre- quently, especially in Prose writers, with a Preposition: as, ■'■ (a.) Verecundum Bacchum sanguineis prShtbete rixis. Save ve honest Bacchus from blood-stained frays I—Rot. ^ Libgrare alJquem culpa. To free a man frmn, ftZaww.— Cic. -Q^^f^^^^^ oi,2,M5fna-feone destmt,rercingetorix abandoned the siege. c^J^iiiofthe'^'^ljzt^z^^:^^ ^'-y -^'' ^^'^^ ^^^^ frJ^Th^:il^^^x^:is^^^^^ Eumaft omni erratione lihSrnvit tTo a...^^ jh- r*h tj^ ^ " ^t'JJT' '•"""^-°-- ■ ^i^^ quite »i?f:;ierwitt § 302. 5 311. THE ABLATIVE CASE. Ml itions: it er, cause, Ip of the irg. lie pursuits Ablative it in the om. See yiefram, le Abla- li Verbs ore fre- osition : ye honest he knotty the siege. 3 violent ig pelted 'rom cui nt with /•J/^^* ^^^ ^^lative is used after Adjectives denotini^ freedom or exemption from : as, ''^vos aenoting allf^;S^l^''''''^'''''''''^^^''^h^ strong mind is free /ram fortuZ^sT^ •^'^''"^ ^^P«^*««' ^^^^ of character as well as thIibktfvT. :t '''" " ""' ''''' "'"^^ ^'"^"*' ^^^^^"« Auctiritat^ nobis Gpus est. We have r^ of authority. -Qic Opus est mature fa^to. There is need of prompt exeeutim.^^W. 2. Ablative of Origin. of Lparatbn! ^'''*'"' ''^"^^" "^"^ ^'^^ ^^ *^^ ^^l^^ive thf V.%?^^^ '^^^''^T ^^ ^"S^^ ^« ^^^^^ especially after genitus. begotten of: also m the Poets with satus. editus. creatua cretus, sprung from or legotten of: as, Jd-jje natus at Mma, 5om of Jove and Mala.— Cio. Orte 5a<«rrao, thou offspring of Saturn !— Hot. Quo sangutne cretus, From what blood (family) sprung — Virg ^^Iba Oriundum sacerdotium, A priesthood that had its origin in Alba. Obs. But oriundus and likewise ortus when it refers to more remote origin, are more frequently used with a Preposition : as Hippocrates et Epicydes, nuti Carthaglne, sed oriundi ab Svracflsis 3. Ablative of Cause, Manner, Instrument. § 311. The Ablative is used after Verbs, Participles, and Adjectives, to denote the Cause, Manner, Means, or Imtrumsnt ot an Action or state of being : as, all mLgZm 2' "ic"* '' ^^"P^^*' ^^ -» ^■«»-- -^ fil^ res^f^h:^i:'Zal^:i:S ^""''"^*' ^^ ^^^^^^" ^^^^'^ ^^"' •— ««c^« '0 t«e rffc-oT U7jc/i cauaZr;/ awtf war-chariots.— Q&Qa. Epaminondas princeps meo judXdo Graecie,e, Epaminmdas in mv ifid^rnent, the foremost man of Greece.— Cic. n'^Tiwiaas, m my 142 THE ABLATIVE CASE, §312. liiS, Ennius fuit major natu quam Plautus et Naevius. Enniua was earlier in his period ofhirth than Plautus and Naevius.— Cio. Corntbus tauri, apri denttbus, morsu Lonea, Be tnt&ntar. Bulls with {their) horns, boars with {their) tusks, lions by biting, defend themselves.— yjic. Obs. Hence the Ablative is used after a Passive Verb without a preposi- tion to denote the thifig by which a purpose is effected ; but if the agent is c ^r/'"*^.*^® preposition a or ab is required with the Ablative: see § 234, Oba. 1. By the poets, however, the Ablative is sometimes used alone : as, Scrlberis Vario, Tliott shalt be written of by Variua.—Jlor. § 312. 1. If the manner in which anything is done be expressed by a Substantive and an Adjective, the Ablative is generally used without cum : 2. But if the 7nanner is expressed by a Substantive alone, curn must be used : as, Miltiades res Chersonesi mmmd aequitate constltuit, Miltiadea arranged the affairs of the Cfiersonesus with the greatest fairness.— Nep. Athenienses cum silentio auditi sunt. The Athenians were heard with saent attention. — Liv. Obs. 1. The Substantives signifying manner, as mSdus, rUio, moa, rltus, eon- suetudo, never take the preposition cum : as, hoc modo, in this manner • Persarum more, after the custom of the Persians. Ols. 2. The student should observe that where with in English means in company with, cum is always used ; but where with denotes the instrument, as, to kill a person with a sword, cum cannot be used, but only the Ablative of the instrument. § 313. The Ablative is used with Intransitive verbs to express the cause of anything happening, especially the cause of feelings or emotions, as, for example, ardere stiidio, to hum with zeal ; exsultare gaudio, to exult with joy ; interire (perire, mori) fame, todi/} of hunger; gaudere (laetari) amici adventu, to rejoice at the arrival of a friend; gloriari victoria sua, to boast of his victory; confidere natura loci, to trust in the nature of the ground : as. Delicto ddlere, correctione gaudere, nos Sportet, We ought to grieve at a Jault, to rejoice at its correction.~Gic. Nomtnihus \mmm gloriantur, They glory in the names of the ancients — Uic. § 314. The Adjectives, which express a state of the feelings, are followed by an Ablative of the Cause : as, contentus, contented, laetus, rejoicing, stiperbus, proud, fretus, rely- ing on, and, less frequently, moestus, sorrowful, anxius, anxious : as, Fretus dillgentia vestrd, dissSro brSvius, Melying on your diligence, 1 treat (the matter) more briefly. — Cic. § 312. was earlier , Bulls with iemselves. — t a preposi- the agent is blative : see letimes used done, be Ablative bstantive Milticules 8. — ^Nep. lere heard , rltus, eon- lis manner ; L means tn instrument, the Ablative verbs to ally the e studio, interire i) amici victoria trust in » grieve at e ancients. ' of the ise : as, tus, rely- modous : ligence, 1 §317. THE ABLATIVE CASE. 143 Paticis contentiis, Content with litOe.—lloT. ^^^^Phoebe sGperbe lyra, Thou Phoehus who iukest pride in thy lyre!- Obs. For dignus, indignus, see § 320. J^^^.,l^X^^lP^''^^^^f^^^tor.truor. fangor. vescor. nitor, pStior, with their compounds, govern an Ablative: as, way^-ao' '"'^ ""^^^"^^ "'""'' ^^' ^"' '"«" "«^ '•««*'>" in' the best .«. ni^^' niarmmis refcMS frufmur atque Htlmur, We enjoy and make use of very many maritime productions.— Cic. '^^ gre^t^t-^r '"' ^'''*^' ''*'*^' '^^'^'"^"^ "^'"^'^ ^'"^''^ '^ Obs. 1. Most of the aboTe are Instrumental Ablatives : the Deponents having been or.gmal y Passives or Keflectives. The Ablative ^ithT-STs perhanf governed by the Comparative implied in it (§ 319). ^ ^ Obs 2^ Fdtior sometimes takes the Genitive; especially in the phrase rerum pohn, to obtain the management of affairs.~Cic. ,J f^'' 7-^^^^ ^^ ^"'^"'^' *^^^^*^' valuing, exchanging; and ^ft^ff- ''/t?'"'' ^'^"' ^^^ ^^^' cheap, are used with the Ablative cf Price ; as, Lycui-gus Smi singfila noii pScunia, sed compensdtione mercium Ss^^;?l^lS« '''^'' '- '^'''' "''^-■^^ --^' ^^ Miitat quadrata r(y?Zms or uw^<: govern an Ablative of the means or manner : as, audn'^s-s'^n' '^'''^''^^'^'^ abundat, Germany abounds in streum, 144 THE ABLATIVE CASE. §3ia -.^ Cera rgferta nStis, A wax tablet full of marJca.—Ov. ^^^'nrl Zr^^ °//"*"^ ^"'^ '^''"' '■"'■^^y «^°^«''° t^e Genitive ; but Adjectives more frequently govern the Genitive than the Ablative: see §276 /« '^goLfa^ltti^f ^^^^^^^^^^^^^ *»•• -- -^- t'^^ -le. an. J.ot"-?lau?"* ^^^*^^'''' "'°'' -^^ **" ''''^^'"^ '"■* «'°««<'-y«»^ W'.YA OJs. 3. Praeditus, endowed mth, also governs the Ablative : ai fn^Z.-i£!^^'^ '""'" «^°^P"«™°' ^A« mn«i is endowed M perpetual 4. Ablative of Quality. PpLni®' ^Tt-^^^^^^M °^Q"^1% is used in describing a Person or Thing. Like the Genitive of Quality (§ 274)7 it requires an Adjective to be in agreement with it : as, 5. Ablative of Comparison. § 319. The Ablative is used after Comparatives instead ofquam with the Nominative, and also instead of qmm with the Accusative of the subject in the construction oi the Accusative with the Infinitive : as, Nihil est ofooaa sSnectuts ( = quam otiosa senectus) iucundius Nnthinn M more delightful than an old age cf retirement.~(Sc: ^ Tullus Hostllius Bomiilo ( = quam Romulus) fuit ftrocior T HnstiUu, was more warlike than Bomulus—Liy. rerocior, I . Mostthus /J. ??^^^ ^^^^^ .^^^^ majorem esse terra (quam terram^ We knm„ that the sun is much greater than the earth.-Cic. *^"^"^>'' ^^ *«<>«; Obs. 1. The Ablative instead otquam, with the Object-AccusatJve is rare in prose, when the Accusativ ■ is a Substantive, but frequentt poetry :L ^,u!i\fr^^ «aKi7«^ne vip^rino (= quam sanguinem viperinum) oautius ^*** i'-,5?! "^^l^"""" " '''''" "'"'^ '"''"'' ^'^^ Predicates are compared : as. MdtiMes amicior (fuit) omnium Ilbertati guam suae domMni § 32i. sdi eat ( §320 govern Vh'tui tation, no\ Quam of day I— §321. thing is nexion ■\ Turrej than the w Q. Poi dder than Qwoqi m(yre (by v labour doe. §322. by the A Plato u writing in i Extremi his bcyhood §323. an Attrib Aurlgat in his youth Ter in a Obs. Th( (but a in tint § 324. ' expressed the Prepoi Agamena difficulty in i SM. L. G. § 32i. THE ABLATIVE CASE. 145 6. Ablative of Measure. § 321. The AblatiVe of Measure denotes b,/ howmmh one nexion with Comparative words : as, 7. Ablative of Time. wlv^^ivT''^*™^®''*" *e question TTfctt ? is exnressed by the Ablative without a Preposition : m, ^''^'^^'^ anSbS'ti^'p®"'''*^!-' ™ ''?"''*'°S ^™« i« without an Attributive the Preposition in is generally used : as Ter in anno. Thrice in the year.~Cic. thrpS;litfon':.^^f*'™ alone,orbytheAblative with ^^XTr;™ S™a ^i: „%™ ^1" -**■"• ^'■««'» -«. SM. L. G. H 146 THE ABLATIVE CASE. §325. r.,.1^- ,^-*^.*^^*^!^^^*.' '^} ^^^^^^ Jagurthae in diehus proxtmis cWcen> Itaha dccodgront, The Senate decreed that the amha$8ador$ of Juourtha nfiould depaH from Italy within the next ten days.— "Sep. § 325. The answer to the question ffow long before ? or How long after ? is expressed by the Ablative with ante or post after it. But the Accusative may be used with ante or post preceding it. If the Preposition is placed between the numeral and the substantive, either the Ablative or Accu- satiye may be used. Thus all the following forms may be used with the same meaning : Acctisativ'e. ante or post tres annos t, post tertium anmim tres ante or post annos tertium ante or post annum Ablative. tribus annis ante or post, tertio anno ante or post, tribus ante or post annis. tertio ante or post anno. When anfe or pos^ Stands last, it may govern a proposition depending upon it : as, r1M^"r*- .5"T^^"'?. f ^^''f P?'^ ^"""^^ condltam Livius fabalam lime.-S' ''"^ •^'''^''"'^ "" '^'*'''"'* ^^^ ^'"" "•^'' ^*« Mnding of Ohs \fhm ante or post is foUowed by jwam and a verb, the followini, constructions may be used : i""«u.« Tribus annis post, quam (or postqnam) venSrat Post tres annos quam venSrat. Tertio anno post, quam (or postqnam) venSrat. Post annum tertium quam venSrat. Or post may be omitted : Teitio anno quam venSrat. All these expressions signify equally, Three years afU^ hs had come. 8. Ablative of Place. § 326. The answer to the question Where? is put in the Ablative both without and with a Preposition. § 327. The construction of the names of Towns and small Islands, m answer to the question Where ? is ex- plained \r § 257. § 328. The following Ablatives are used ^vithout a Pre- position, m answer to the question Where ? dextra, on the right hand; laeva, sinistra, on the left hand; terra mlrlque, on sea and land; beUo, m the field (comp. § 258); as, IntCnuit laeva, It thundered on the left hand.—Yirg. Teird manque conquirSre, To malie search hy sea and land.-Cic §332. §329 Iter, ar( position Athen oavip in a Aureli § 330. be put ii Quis tc Oie sea '( — Tota A §331. be used : In ItSl Sail. In hac without the Obs. Tl freelj hiyhu §332. Participle and are n any other His rein things (lit., i Goes. PythagSi came into It verbrn reign; AWquid i -Cic. ObB. 1. T (§ 322] Ablativ dition G of the s Obs. 2. Ai of Depc changed 'what wi Caesa army, h §325. §332. THl'. ABLATIVE CASE. 147 position, whel so J A^t^lbSivtl,^^^^^^^^^ t^tr • L^^^ <^mttTSi"?J,r^^ ^^^^^t" ^^- Athenians formed \l.n AureUa via prOfectus est. He set orU hy the Aurelian way.-Cio Tola AsiB, Throughout aU Aaia.—(3ie. 9. Ablative Absolute. § 332 When a Substantive or Pronoun too-etI,»r »iti, any other word, fl.e, af^^^^^ the^^lIISSfr*'' ^JUlqmd salvi. igll^ 5g5„. r» do a thing ,mout breaking the la^,. AWaare of Manner (S 3U), '." to thl 3r5"MT*' !. '"°'"™ »' "■" dltionor attendant ciroux;,toc"o?thafwhlh™J' *?*' """ «•"" of the sentence as taklngTlare " ''™''>"»' " «>« ■»! e;«ngea int^ fl.e P...,.e, S^t ta^h^e'lt^HriV^hS'^'-^r'^.S •wiiai. was before Ub own object • as -iu..ouivO agiccing- with n2 y 148 THE VOCATIVE CASE. § 3TO. § 333. Sometimes a perfect participle passive is put in the Ablative Absolute, where the Substantive is repre- sented by an entire clause : as, Nondum comperto, in qiiam rggionem vcnisset, It not being yet ascer (ained into what quarter he had come. — Liv. Excepto quod non stmul esses, cetSm laetus, Tliis fact excepted that you are not with me, (I am) happy in all beside. — Hor. Obs. This construction occurs most frequently in the case of the Ablatives audlto, cognUo, comperto, and the like. § 334. The Ablative Absolute is frequently used with one Substantive in Apposition to another without any participle, because the verb sum has no Present or Perfect Participle : as, Natus est Augustus, M. Tullio GtcSrone et Antonio consQlIbus, Au- gustus was lorn when M. Tullius Cicero and Antonius were consuls.— 8\iet, Si se inviw trnnsire c5narentur. If they should attempt to cross against his mil (lit., he being unwilling). — Caes. Chapter XL. — The Vocative. § 335. The Vocative Case indicates the object spoken to: as, Recte te, Cyre, beatum ftrunt, With reason, Cyrus, do they proclaim thee happy. — Cic. Et tu, Brute, And thou too, Brutus I Obs. Hence the Pronouns of the Third Person, as sui, hie, ille, iate, &o., with the Eelative, can have no Vocative. § 336. The Vocative is often introduced by the Inter- jection 0, especially in the Poets : as, O lux Dardaniae, thou light of the land of Troyl—Yhg. O dgcuB imperii; thou glory of the empire/— Lucan. Obs. This use of the Interjection must not be confounded with that ex- plained in § 250 : the Vocative is used ouly in speaking to or invocation. § 337. A Substantive or other word in Apposition with a Vocative sometimes stands in the Nominative : as, Audi tnpopHlus Albdnus, Hear, thou people of AUba l—JAy. Obs. Perhaps this apparent Nominative Is to be regarded as an old form of the Vocative ; fop it is found even without Apposition : as, AgMum ponitfex pubttcus pSptlli RomOni, praei verlia. Oo to noto-, than national pontiff of the people of Rome, repeat before me the form of words 1 — LiT. I is put in ) is repre- ing yet ascer excepted that ' the Ablatives used with thout any or Perfect isQlIbus, Au- nsuls.—Snet, cro88 against S 343. ADJECTIVES. 149 lot spoken hey prodaim ille, iate, &c., the Inter- with that ex- invocation. ition with as, -Liv. m old form of I to *!^P. thou rm ofwordiJ Chapter XLI.— Adjectives. § 338. The ordinary rules for the construction of Ad- jectives are given under the Second Concord (§§ 223-227) and the several Cases of Substantives. The foUowino- are 01 a more special nature. ° §339. A Masculine Adjective is often used without a bubstanhve to denote Persons; and a Neuter Adiective to denote Hiings : as, ^^Omnes omnia bona dicSre, All {men) say all hinds of good ^things). Parvum parva dgcent, Small {things) hefit a small (wan).— Hor. ^^tuLS^^ ''^•? *!\f ^l™*"**""" o' the Adjective alone would not be a mi.™ hS' *^' S"^«tantive h8mo or res must be expressed: thus, multoium hfimKnum, o/many persons; multurum rcrum, of many things. [Multorum alone might refer to either persons or things.] ^ ^hJ;^*?''"":?^'^'^^''"''''"^"'"'*"^"'^^ ^"^ this way in the Plural: as, docti, learned men. But in the Singular vir or homo ia usually added as, homo doctus, a learned man. "■'"""j' "uutu . §341. Adjectives equivalent to Substantives.— Sometimos an Adjective is used in Latin where the English idiom re- quires a bubstantive. This is the case with summus. at the top, the top of; infimus or imus, at the bottom, the bottom of; medius, the middle • extremus, last, at the end of; primus, first, at thebegi7mng of; reliquus, remaining, the remainder of; dimidiatns, halmd, the half of : rb, Ad Imam quercum, At the foot of an oaA;.— Plmcdr. Unus dimldiatusque mensis, One month and a half.— do, Extrema higme, At the end of winter, —Cia. Rgllqua vita. The rest of life.— Cio. Obs. But reUquum is also found as a Neuter Substantive governinfj tho Oenitive : as, reliquum vitae (= reliqua vita), Liv. § 343. Adjectives eqmvr.lent to Adverbs.—AAjeGtivea are often used along with Verb^ where the English idiom requires an Adverb. This occurs when the word may be regarded as describing the condition of the actor, rather than the manner ot the action ; also in the case of some Adjectives of time place, or attitude : as, ' ^ Ego eum a me invUisstmus dimisi, I parted with him very unwilUnghj. PlQs hSdie bCni imprUdens* fpni, mmm iwitmu on+c v>iir.,. Ai^-t- -i-^n -. tin r~ r ^"^^ ^ M)iM;i«%Zy, than I ever before did wit- 160 AT)JE0TIVE8. § 345. The fullowing Adjectives aro some of those most fio- quentiy used in the above manner : invitus, unwilling, un- willingly ; laetus, joyful, joyfully ; llbens = libenter, gladly, with pleasure ; aciens, knowing, knowingly ; iraprudena, uimitting, un- wittingly ; impgritus, unskilled, unskilfully ; also, matatinus, in th morning ; pronua, on one's face ; fliipinus, on one's back ; siibllmis, aloft. § 345. Prior, primus, po8t§rior, postremi'.s, are used in agi'eo- raent with a Substantive, where in English a relative clause with the verb to be is required : as, Iliinnlbal primus cum exercttu Alpestransiit, Hannibal was the first tcliO crossed the Alps toith an army. Hispania postrema omnium provinciarum perdSmtta est, Spain wa» the last of all the provinces which loas thoroughly subdued. — Liv. Obs. The use of prior, pr: lus, and posterior, poatremm, must be carefully distinguished froia that of the corresponding adverbs prius, primum, etc The Adjectives serve to compare a person with some one else (in point of time) ; the Adverbs, to denote the order of the Subject's own action : thus primus dixit, means he was the first who spoke; primum dixit, he first ip'ike, and then, etc. Comparatives. § 346. AVhen two members of a comparison are united by fj'iim, the second member is put In the same case as the firfct, when the verb or governing word belongs to both : as, Neque hribet [Aerws meus] plus sipientiao quam lapis, Nor has m [my maslerli any more sense than a stone (has). — Pi, DScet nobis cariorera esse patriam, quam nosmetipsos. Our country ought to be dearer to us than ourselves. — Cic. § 347. But ifthe first member ofacomparison is governed by a word which does nut belong to the second, the verb mm must be used with the Irtter, though in English the verb to be is frequently omitted : as, Haec verba sunt Varronis, hSmtnis doctioris quam fuit Claudius, lltese are the words of Varro, a more learned man than Claudius.- QelL Verres urgsntum reddidit L. Cordio, hSmlni non gratiosiori, quam On. Calidius est, Verres restored the silver to L. Cordius, a man not more influential than Cn. Calidius. — Cic. Obs. If the first member of the clause is in the Accusative, the second i* frequently put in the same case by attraction : as, Ego homKnem callTdiorem vidi nemtoem qur.m Phormionem (= qusm Phormio est), I have seen no man more cunning ihan Phormio. — Ter. Patrem tarn pl^cKdum reddo quam dvem (=quam fivis est), I make my father as quiet as a sheep. — Ter. § 348. The Comparativo frequently governs the Ablative, with the omission of quam. This is explained under § 319. $ 353, § 340. numeral quam, as the cons' Son jji Qua, four I Pictort cfiloribus, two thousa § 350. mafis is Adjectiv( Corpori strong. — L Paulli i vxis more i §351. exists in SCnecti tice. ~Gio. Volupb mJten it is t Obs. 1. and q Pn one m Obs. 2. ' parati Mq be abl Dai great §352. instead of Artiua a § 363. '. lative of J the case without p $ 353, ADJECTIVES. 151 § 340. Plus and ampUua, more, and minus, lesy are used with namerals and wo'-ds of quantity, either with or witliout quam, as inaocliuable words, and without influence upon the construction : as, Non plu8 quam quattuor millia effugerant (not effugit), Not mom uuui,four thousand escaped. — Liv. Pictorea antlqui non sunt usi piua (not pluribua) quam quattnor cfiloribus, The ancient painters did not use more than four colours. Oic. Minus duo millia hOmlnum ex tanto exisrcltu effiigerunt, Less limn two thousand men escaped out of so great an army. — Liv, § 350. When two Adjectives are compared together, maeis is either used with the first Adjective, or botll Adjectives are in the comparative degree : as, Corpora magna mdgit quam firma, Bodily frames rather hia tlian strong.— lay. ^ PauUi contio fuit verior quam grdtior piJpillo, The speedi of FauUus WIS more true than popular.— Lvr, § 351. The Comparative also denotes that the qualitv exists in a considerable or too high a degree : as, Senectus est natura Iffquucior, Old age is naturally somewliat talka- tice, ~Cio. Vuluptas, quum major est, omne animi lumen exstinguit, Pleasure, tvli^n it is too great, extinguishes all light of the mind.— do. Obs. 1. Too great in proportion to something is translated by the Comparative and quam pro : as, Proelium atrociua quam pro nflmPro pugnantium, A fiercer battle than one might expect from the number of the combatants. — Liv. Obs. 2. T^z same notion in connexion with a Verb is expressed by the Com- parative and quam qui or quam ut : as, Mqjor sum quam cui possit fortuna nScere, lam too great for fortune to he able to injure. — Ov. Damna mSjora sunt quam quae aestSnari possint, The losses are too great to be able to be estimated, — Liv. § 352. Atqne and ac are sometimes used by the poets instead of qitam after Comparatives : as, Artivs atque hgdSra, More closely than ivy. — Her. Superlatives. § 363. To express the highest possible degree, the Super- lative of Adjectives and Adverbs is used with quam, or in the case of maA-imus with quautus also, either with or without possum : as, 152 ADJECTIVES. § 354. iaro:if/Z\rcZ~sr ^''*"* ^°^^" '^^*' •'"^*^'''« ^-^^ <'- Dicuin quam brCvisstme, I wiU speak cu briefly as pos»ible.-Cio. ^tcmLg'" "'^•^"''''""^"y fi"'^ "' '"»t^»»Wio»» S"« «ai >«»!«■«-, / mn a> much a ;r,end to the eommotmeullh at any om in the world.— Ck. §366. " All the lest," •• aU the wisest," mi similar phrases are expressed by ,ui„u, with the Superlative : as, § 354. ha rai$es the itadlOrumquf acter and in fl.-Oio. ly difference of d by the la praeatant- le moat dia- ■ua omnium I both by the , Alcibiadea S 362. PRONOUNS. Chaptek XLII.— Pronouns. 103 1. The Personal Pronouns. (See § 75.) § 367. The Personal Pronouns are not UBiially expressed when they are the Subjects of personal Verbs. But they must be expressed where emphasis is required : as, Ego te Ittudavi, tu me culpasti, I havepraiaed thee, thou haat hlained me. No8, no8 conaflloa desflmus, It ia we, we the conauls, who are wantino ' {in our duty) /— Oic. § 369. The plural forms nostrum, vestnim, must be cave- fully distinguished from nostri, veatri. The former alone (being true Plurals) are used as Partitive Genitives, or in connexion with omnium. Thus one of us is unus nostrum ' (not unus nostri) ; the wish of you all, omnium vestrum (not vestri) voluntas. — Cic. Oba. Nostri, vestri, are not true Pluro's, but the Genitives Singular Neuter of noster, vester, used abstractly, 'i bus, mCmor nostri = mindful of our interest (i. o. of us.) n qui and mild aa the 08 much a phrases 3 wisest of Ihe deepest 2. Reflective Pronouns of the Third Person. (See § 76.) § 360. The Eeflective Pronoun sui, sibi, se. with the Pos- sessive Pronoun suus, refer to the subject or Nominative case of the sentence : as, Niciaa tua sui mgmCria delectatur, Niciaa ia delighted with your recollection of him. — Cic. Bestiis hQmlncs uti possunt ad amtm titlKtatem, Mm can make use of animals for their own advantage. — Cic. § 361. The Possessive Pronoun suus in principal sentences sometimes refers to the Object or to another case, when there is a close connexion between the two words : as, Eannthalem sui elves e civKtate ejecerunt, His own citizens drove Hannibal out of the state.— Cic. CS,tHina admSnebat alium Sji^estutis, alium cflpldltatis suae, Catiline reminded one of his poverty, another of his {riding) passion.- Sail. Sua cHjusque anlmantis uatura est, Every living creature has its own nature.— Cic. § 362. In subordinate propositions, sui, sibi, se, and suus „• ^^1 '••■•■ •■'•'J '•-• tiiT^ ijMi--jvT_ u Ox tiiclu piv/pUcilluii, DiiL also to the subject of the principal proposition, especially n3 354 PRONOUNS. § 363i when that proposition expresses the thoughts or wishes of the previous subject : as, (Procalus) dixisso fertur, a se visum esse EomtQum, Proeulua It re- •ported to have said that Romulus had been seen by him.— Cic. Ariovistus respondet. si quid Caesar a se vSlit, ilium ad «e vSnIre oportere, Ariovistus replies that, if Caesar wishes anything of him [Ariovistus), he ought to come to him {Ariovistus).— C&ea. 3. Possessive Pronouns. (See § 77.) § 363. The Possessive Prorouns are frequently omitted m Latin, when they are not emphatic, and can be easily supplied from the context ; as, Apud m^frem recte est, AU is wett vnth {^om) mother.— Cic. ad Att Befratre confide Ita esse ut semper vSlui, As for (my) brother, I feel confident that aU is as I desired.— ih. ' •' V 9^ *««r,i/«sei Obs. The Possessive Pronouna often denote aomemng proper or favowable to : as, 8U0 loco, suo teinp8re, at a favourable place or time, 4. Demonstrative Pronouns. (See § 78.) § 364. Hie is the Demonstrative Pronoun of the First Person, and denotes this near me. Hence it may frequently be translated hy present or some similar word : as, Opus vel in hac magnmcentia urbis consp5[ciendum, A work worthy of being seen even in the present magnificenee of the cUy.—Uy. Qui haeo vKtfipSrari vSlunt, Those who wish the present state of thinas to be blamed.—Qic. j -y Sex. StQla, judex hie noster. Sextus Stola, who sits here as our judge. § 365. Die is the Demonstrative Pronoun of the Third Person, and denotes that near him or yonder. Hence it is used to denote something at a distance, which is well known or celebrated : as. Ex suo reguc sic Mithridates pi«fugit, ut ex eodem Ponto Medga 7.ZZa quondam profugisse dicltur, Mithndates fled from his kingdom just as the famous Medea fled once upon a time from the same Pontus.— Cic. § 366. When hie and ille are used together, referring to two persons or things mentioned before, hio refers to the nearer, ilk to the more remote : as, Caesar bgngRciis atque munlflcentia magnus habebatur, integrltate vitae Cato. Ille mansuetudlne et mltserlcordia clams tUctus, huic seve- ixtns dignitatem addtdgrat, Caesar teas deemed great for his qenerositu ana mumfir^nrji. (Intn fiw the omnHoo^n^aa ^-f ?.,•■. ;;a. rm,, eJL ^ *? gamed renown by his gentleness and clemency: on the latter severity had conferred distinction.— Sell. § 363i r wishes sulus it re- I 86 vSnire tg qf him omitted )e easily !. ad Att tier, I fed favourable ■) le First iquently rh worthy ^ of things mr judge. > Third ce it is is well ;o Med€a idom just I.— Oic. [•ring to ! to the itegrltate uie seve- jenerosity :incx had erityhad i 876. PRONOUNS. 155 § 368. Iste is the Demonstrative Pronoun of the Second I erson, and denotes that near you or that of yours : as, De Mis rebus exspecto tuas littgras, Concerning those thinaa (where ym are) 1 am expecting your letters. — Cic. lata oratio, That speech {which you make).— Cio, § 369, Iste often has a contemptuous meaning, especially in addressing an opponent : as, lute vir opttmus. That excellent man ofyoura (ironically).— Cic. Obs. The distinction in meaning between hie, ille, iste is found in the adverbs derived from them. 5. Determinative Pronouns. (See § 79.) § 370. Is refers to some person or thing determined by the context : as, P. Asiiiius Asellus mortuus est C. Sacerdote praetore. la quum Mberet untcam fdiam, earn bSnis suis heredem instltuit, ^ Asinius AaeUus died in the praetorship of C. Sacerdos. Since he had an only daughter, he appointed her heir to his property. — Cic. § 371. The Accusative and Dative of is are frequently omitted, when they would be in the same case and refer to the same object as in the previous clause : as, Fratrem timm in ceteris rebus laudo : in liac una reprehendSre cogor, In other respects I commend your brother : in this alone I am com- peUed to censure (him). Non obsistam fratris tui vSluntati ; favere non pStgro, I witt not stmd in the way of your brother's desire : further (it) I cannot. Obs. Sometimes the Accusative of is is omitted, even when it refers to a different case : as, Libri, de quibus scrlbis, mei non sunt; sumpsi a fratre meo, The books about which you write are net mine ; I borrmoed (them) from, my brother. § 375. Idem may often be translated by also or on the other Jiand, when it denotes similarity or opposition in reference to a person or thing already mentioned : as. Nihil utKle, quod non tdem hSnestum, {There is) nothing expedient vahim IS not also honourable. — Cic. Invent! multi sunt, qui vitam profundgre pro patria prirati esseut, iidem glonae jactiiram ne mMmam quidem fflcgre vellent, TTiere have been found many wlio were prepared to pour out life for their country, and at the same time would not make the very lease sacrifice ofqloru (on her behalf). — Cic. § 376. Ipse gives emphasis to the word with which it agrees, and may often be translated by very, just, or exacth as, Quaeram ex ipsa, IwiU enquire of the woman herself— do. .11 • J - 156 PRONOUNS. § 377. AccYpio quod dant ; rnlhi gnim sStis est, ipsis non gStis, I accept xehat Viey give: for it is plenty /or me though not for tliemiselves.—Cio. Ibi mlhi TuUiSla mea fait praesto, natali suo ipso die, Tliere met me my {daughter) Tullia : just on her vtry. birthday.— Oie. Orassus triennio ipso minor erat quam Antonius, CroMus was younger than Antony by exactly three years.~Cic. § 377. Ipse, when joined to a personal pronoun, agrees with the Subject or the Object, according as either one or the other is more emphatic. Thus " me ipse laudo," I (but not another prrson) praise myself; but "me ipsum laudo," I praise myself {but not another person) : as, Non ggeo mSdIcina p. e. ut alii me oonsolentur] ; me ipse conaolor, I do not require any medicine ; I comfort myself. — Oio. Cato se ipse intgremit, Cato slew himself [i.e. others did not slay him]. Fratrem euum dein seipsum interfecit, He slew his brother and after- wards himself. — Tac. 6. Relative and Correlative Pronouns. (See § 80.) § 378. The chief rules for the agreement of the Relative and its antecedent are given in §§ 228-230. § 379. Correlation. — The following is a list of the prin- cipal ^Relative Pronouns, with their respective correlatives or regular antecedents, and their corresponding Adverbs : COBRELATIVBS. is, idem taUs tautns totCindecl.) Advebbs. Ita talltter (rare) tantSpere toties (-ens) Bestiae in quo 15co natae sunt ex eo se non commSvent, Beasts do not move from the region in which they were born.— Cic. Eudem uttlttatis quae hSnestatis est regQla, The rule of expediency i$ ' the same as that of hmour.— Cic. Quotes princlpes, taks .... cives, Like rulers, like people.— Cic. Tantas Spes quantas nunc hftbet, non haberet, Ho would not be in possession of nuch wealth as he now possesses.— C\c. QudtiescnnqviG dico, tSties mihi videor in judicium v6nire. As often at I speak, so often do I seem to stand my trial.— Cic. Obs. 1. After talis, tantut, tot and the corresponding Adverbs, the Relative* qualis, quantus, etc., aie often left to be understood • as, Q'.!P.pso tarn nngisstrn? talis vir {se. qualis iu ci-'; punis domum, Pf'y'hee, being such a man [as ihou art), buildeat thou so small a home /— Phaedr. Kelatives. qui qualis quantus quot (itidecl.) nt qualiter quantopere quoties (-ens) § 335. PRONOUNS. 157 tive antecedent^ ie sL^r^^^^^^ ^^ "f^ -^.^'^ «-^ adeLmina- SJeSr-/-^ -^-^^«' -- ^^^ >J^- - ^«^!U-cTc''' ^''''"''^'' ^-'^^ *i'^«"^«'r "'A/cA « eallca itkat of) § 381 When in English a Relative sentence defines and ante Ident 'thT^'' ^ S-Perlatiye in agreemen? wftrtSe Substantive or Adjective in their own clause • as Ois. Talis. tau.u8 are often foUowed by the Subjunctive with ut. 7. Indefinitive Pronouns. (See § 82.) § 383. AliquiB is more emphatic than quia. Hence dISmw' Sl?fnf :M^ ''' iB an enclitic^s;d^rr\Sfve nlm!. as conjunctions quum, si, nisi, ne and nf Ll^\ ft^dam, a cenfam ori«, denotes a person or thing dSlt ""as!""" ''^''^*'»" ■» --'-^^^l -oa«„7 0? «»Wam ex advOoatia inWlIgtoe « dkit, non id Sgi, ut vainn invS. 158 PRONOUNS. § 386. nirctur, One of the assistant counsel said he cotdd see the object aimed at was not the discovery of truth. — Cic. Habitant hio quaedam irnllerciilao, Tliere duxU liere certain youna women. — Ter. '^ ^ § 386. The substantive quisquam and the adjective uUoa, any om whatever, are used in negative propositions, and in questions with the force of a negation, and with stne : as, JustJtia nunquam nScet cuiquam, qui earn habet, Justice never harm any one who possesses it. — Cic. Sine sSciis nemo quidquam tale cSnatur, No one attempts anythinq of the sort witlumt associates. — Cio. ^ -i> j Sine virtute nSque amicttiam neque ullam rem expStendam ooMgqm p08siimu8, Without virtue we cannot attain eitlwr to friendship or to any desirable object.— Gic. •- x- » Quid est, quod quisquam dignum Pompeio aflferre possit ? What is there thai any one can advance worthy of Pompey ? — Cic. § 388. Quisque denotes each one hy ^emse?/(distribntively), and in principal sentences is always placed after se and mas: as, 8lU quisque maxKme oonsiilit. Everybody cotistdts his own interest above all. — Cic. Suae quemque fortunae maxime poenltet, Everybody has -mod fault to find with his own fortune. — Cic. Oba. In relative sentences quisque stands immediately after the relative, as an enclitic, and consequently precedes se and suus : as, Qv:-im quisque norit artem, in hac se exeroeat, Let each practise himself in the art which he is acquainted with. — Cic. § 389. Quisque is also used with the Compaxative and Superlative. See examples under § 356. § 390. Alius, when repeat )6., signifies one . , . another ; alter, when repeated, signifies the one . . . the other (being used of only two persons or things) : as, ProfSrebant alii purpttram, tus alii, gemmas alii, They brought for- ward some purple, others incense, others precious stones.— Qic. Alter exercltum perdldit, alter vendldit, The one has lost an army, the other sold one. — Cic. S 399. THE VERB: INDICATIVE MOOO, 159 Chapter XLIR^The Verb: Indicative Mood. § 391. The Indicative Mood is used, A. To state a proposition ; or, Predicatively. B. To ask a question; or, Interrogatively. Obs, on the use of the Indicative Mood in HypotheUcal sentences, see § 42.. A. The Indicative Mood used Predicatively. § 392. Present Tense. — The PrfiRfinf Tor,o^ • a i , called the Historical Present: as ^'^''^^^^' ^^ ^« ^^nce to I' donr!':s!"*"'"p'^'°* ^' ''*'^ ^''•^ '^^^'' "^ -^^ l^^een ,rougM upon '^ttX To^ itZlS;' ^^^J: £^^ ^^^^^ oBJomfed.— Nep. ' ^^"'^Aaffe t^o kings were annuaUy § 399. Future Tense.—The Future Tense is used of ih^i which is to takfi r»kPA ir, +,-^« + ^ ^^^ ^* ^^t 160 THE vekb: indicative mood. § 400 § 400. Perfect Tense. — This Tonse is used both as a Pre- sent-Perfect and Past-Indefinite Tense (Aorist). Thus feci is either / have done or / did. The context enables ue to tell in which sense it is used : as, Nemo parum diu vixit qui virtutis perfunctu$ e$t munSre, No one has lived Pres.-Perf.) too short a time who has fully discharged the pari of virtue. — Oic. Appius caecus multos armoafuit (PaBt.-ladGf.),Appiua teas blind for many yean. — Oic. § 401. The Perfect Tense is used after postquam, after that ; ut primom, simul atque (ac), as soon as ; ut, ubi, when; where in English we often use the Past-Perfect : as, PelQpIdas non daWtavit, »tmul ac compexit hostem, confligSre, Pdo- pidas did not hesitate, as soon as ever he saw {had seen) the enemy, to engage, — Nep, UM de CaesJiris advsnttiHelvetii ccrtiores facti sunt, legates ad eum mittunt. No sooner had the Helvetii got information of Caesar's arrival tiuin they sent ambassadors to him. — Caes. Ut Hostius cSctdit, confostim Romana inclinatur acies, As soon as Hostius fdl {had fallen), the Homan line immediately gave xoay. — Liv. Ohs. 1. But pos^jwam takes a Past- Perfect when a precise t-ne is specified : as, Hanntbal anno tertio postquam 66mo profugSrat, in AMcam v§nit, Ilann'bal came into Africa thre^ years after he had Jled from home. — Nep. Oha. 2. But quuin, when, usually takes the Subjunctive : v. § 483. § 402. Past-Perfect Ten^e.— The Past-Perfect Tense indi- cates that something had taken place at the time spolcen of: as, ProgCniem Trojano a sanguine duci audiSrat, She had heard tJiat a race was Idng derived from Trojan blood. — Virg. §405. Future-Perfect Tense.— The Future-Perfect Tense indicates that something will have taken place by the time spoken of: as, Eomam quum vemrro, quae perspexero, scribam ad te, WJien I {shall) have got to Bome, I will write to you what 1 {shall) have seen. — Cic. Dum tu haec l6ges, ego ilium fortasse convener o, TVJiile you wiU b« perusing this, I shall perhaps have had an interview with him.— Cic. § 407. Both the Future-Perfect and the simple Future are sometimes used in compound sentences where in English the sign of future time is not expressed : as. Hoc, dum Srtmus in terns, grit caelesti vitae sJmfle, Tliis, wMh we are on earth, will be like the life of the gods. — Cic. Naruram si sequemur dacerii; nuiiquam uburrablmus, If vyo foUow nature as our guide, we shall never go astray. — Cic. § 400 §412. ' THE verb: INDICATIVE MOOD. 161 Do Cartljaglne vgreri non ante dcsinam. quam illam excisam esse cogruwero,! shall not cease to have/ear$ about Carthage, till I learn the haa been utterly destroyed.— Cio. Obs But the future sense is sure to be expressed in one of the clauses, as in the above examples. B. The Indicative Mood used Interrogatively. 1. Single Direct Question. § 408. The Indicative Mood is used with Interrogative I'rononns and Adverbs in asking Direct Questions: as, /?i..^r'f -/"^"^ *^??f,™' C'^"""^' «&«^« patientia nostra, How far, I pray thee, Catiline, wilt thou abuse our forbearance f—Qic. ^ ^ fne?-Ho?^ ""^ *^"*'^"*'' ^°'*"? ^ow does he? hov, does he think of Qu6ta hora est? Wliat o'cloch is it ?— Hor. kI^^^^ ^5 ^^^}}^^ to the Inten^ogative Pronouns and Adverbs, tha following particles are used to indicate a question :— ne (enclitic), nmn; utrum and an. The latter two are used only in asking Double questions ; i. e., questions with two (or more) alternatives. § 410. The Interrogative Particle -ne.—The Particle ng is an enclitic, being always joined to some other word. It is used in asking a simple, straightforward question ; as, „ ^a^.^i^ius rex fnterrogavit : Estisne vos legati oratoresque misli a pCpGloCoUatino? SUmu,- King Tarquinius aS^ed : areyScZdors and spokesmen sent from the people of Collatia ? We are .TLi" Obs. iVe is always joined to the ^r^rwordin the interrogative sentence except when united with non, as nonne (see next sect.). sentence, § 411. JSTonne.—I-D. questions put with a negative such as Isttnotso? Wasitnotso? whei^e the answer F.. is ^vTdently expected, the enclitic is always joined with the negative • tnus, nonne: as, ° ' Oanis nonne similis iQpo (est). Is not the dog like a wolf ?-Cic outr^glZ-e^. ^'' ^^*^*^^P^^««t^t. I'^ ^i ^ot better with valour to die ^ § 412. The Interrogative Particle num.— The ParfiVlA a^^ indicates that the answer Mo is taken for granted. It alwavs begins its sentence : as, *' 162 THE VERB: INDICATIVE MOOD. §4U. Num nSgare audes, Do you dare deny it f—Cic. 2. Double Direct Questions. § 414. The Particles used in asking Double direct ques- tJons are utrum. an, -nS. Utrum is used only in the first aJternative, and an only in the second, while -ng is used in DOtn : as, Utrum ea vestra an nostra culpa est, Is (Itat your fault oroursi^ Cic ^^ fe/^ est quern quaero annon, Is that the man I am seeking, or not 1~ Sunt haeo tua verba necwe, Are these your words or no?— Cio. Obs. 1. liTecne and amon, "or no," are written aa single words. ^t Ihfti "f ' '" *» ' ''"°°^ alternative ; unless that alternaUve is stated in tne form " or no," necne. ^ «amp^es. *"* ^"*'°^' ^"^''"'"^ ^ oftei^omitted, as In the last of the above § 415. An is sometimes apparently/ used in single ques- tions ; bui when so, it always has reference to an alternltive implied though not expressed ; as, ph^^f^J;Lf^J^^''''''' '''^'' ^-i^-yyouf Or is Pan- H^S^ii^ifif/ n "-^f f. «i|«iy5rum SKcIliam virtute tua libgratam? SLSarlr?lcic. '""' ''''''''"' '^^""^ vaJ.ur delivered Jrora 0. ^*auelti„*n^wr''^ examples the former alternative is involved In the first question. Have you anything else to say, or will you say that, &c» § 416. The following table exhibits the sequence of the First Alternative utnun, -n§, (omitted) (omitted) Obs. Concerning Indirect Questions, see § 434. Second, Third, etc. an, an, an, •ne an an an §414. §420. THE XMl'ERATIVE MOOD. 168 what he fuu t adjttvare, I in aiming Bct ques- tho first 3 used in or oun V — or not 1 — Die. ve Is stated f the above te ques- irnative is Pam- bSratam? 'from the 1 the first fee" of the re than Chapteu XLIV.-The Imperative Mood. § 417. Present Tense.-The Present Imperative is used in givmg orders, directions; or advice, wiff reference to the mmediate Present, or without reference to any definite time; also m salutations : as, ^ uennue lessaedSte serta carinae, Crown with chaplets my tired bark -Ov Carpo diem, Seize the {-present) day.— Hot. Salvo 1 Ave I Hail to thee, farewell 1—Cio 5 ilB. Future Kiw.— The Future Imperative is used in comnands and exhortations extending to the fut,l?e™ weS «s tie present; hence it is always employed in 1^8?^, ^^Begio imperio duo m*, £,( «« J^ tm pa-mu, vnth regal pm^.-. § 419. The Subjunctive Present is sometimes used fno* Pei^n: 'as °^*^" I^P«»tive, especially in the ThW Aut bnmt out Sbeal, let Mm eWier drink or begme—do § 42a A prohibition may also be expressed by nS rako rrs^on^llT^P '^' f "^Jr.*^^o^ •* S^^^^^V withTheVhtd Ten^e: "f,*^^ ^"^^«^*' ^^^ ^^ Second Person of the Perfect ^e quid rSi tibi sit cum Saguntinis. Medme not with the SagvrUine., Ne translSria Iberum, Gross not the Ebro.~LW. I^aiil ignoveris, Show no charity for anything i--Oio, 164 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. §431. S 424. Chapter XLV. — The Subjunctive Mood. § 421. The Suhjiinoti ♦ • ! ;od - xpresses a thing not as o.fact like the Indicaiivo, bir, iuerely as a conception of the mind. Hence the Subjunctive Mood is used to indicate, (A). An hypothesis. (B). Doubt or uncertainty (includ.ug indirect quebtions), (C). A wish. (D). Purpose or result. (E). A proposition borrowed from another, and not adopted by the writer {narratio obliqua). (A). Si ita met, ignoscSrem, If it were so, I would excuse it.~Cio. ^ (B). Cur duhttaa quid de republica sentiaa ? Why do you doubt wJuU opinion to entertain concerning a commonwealth?— Cio. Npn duhUat qniu Troja brCvi pgritiira sit, He has no doubt that Troy will soon fall. — Cic. (C). Vdleas et mgmln2ris nostri, May you he prosperous and think of me I— Cic. '' (D). Legibus scrvim'is ut lIV,3ri gssq posslmus, We submit to the lawn that (Purpose) we may be able to be free. — Cic. Accldit ut una nocte oranes Hermae dejtcgrentur, It happened that (Result) in one night all the Hermae were demolished. — Nep. (E). DScent quanto in discrimine sit Nolana res, They point out in wJmt peril Nola is. — Liv. § 422. The Subjunctive Mood is always dependent upon either (1). Some hypothetical Conjunction (see § 425) ; or, (2). Some antecedent sentence or clause to which it is subjoined (subjiingo), and which deprives it of the character of a positive (" objective") assertion. Obs. The antecedent member of the sentence is very often not expressed, but left to be understood. § 423. Sequence of Tenses. — The Tense of a Verb in the Subjunctive Mood must be in concord with the Ten«se of the antecedent Verb upon which it depends. Thus Present or Future time is folio \N'ed by Present or Future, and Past time by Fast. Ill h Oh § 424. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 165 Present and Future Time. Scio quid Igas, Scio quid ogCria, Bcio quid auturus sig, Cognovl quid tlgaa, Cognovi qir.'l cgi-rid, Cognovi quid actiirus sis* I know what you are doing. I kium what ymi have done. I know what you are going to do. I have learnt what you are doing. I have learnt whit you have done. I have learnt what you are going to do. Audiam quid ftgae, Audiam quid egt-ris, Audiam quid acturua sis, I shall hear what you are doing. I shall hear what you have done. I shall hear what you are going to do. Past Time. Scicbam quid lig^rcs, Sciebam quid egitnos, Sciebam quid acturus esses, Cognovi quid ftggres,* Cognovi quid egisses, Cognovi quid acturua esses, Cognovgram quid ftgeres, Cogiiovfirara q jid egisses, CognovSram qui*! acturus esses, J knew what you were doing. I knew what you had done. I knew what you were going to do. I learnt what you toere doing. I learnt what you had done. I learnt what you toere going to do. I had learnt what you were doing. I had learnt ichat you had done. I had learnt whai you were going to do. ♦ But the Perfect Subjunctive may be used after tke Past Indefinite when tlie subordinate proposition is conceived of as a distinct liistori- oal statement : as, Aemtlius Paullus tantum in aerarium pScuniae invexit, ut unius im- pSratoris praeda finem attuhrit trlbutorum, Aemilius Patdlu^ hrottght iiuch an immense sum of money into the treasury, that the spoils of a single general put an end to the taxes. — Oic. Oba. The Historical Present (§ 393) being ia reality a past tense, is often followed by Past Tenses Subjunctive : as, Helvetii legatos ad Caesarem mitiunt, qui dtcSrent, Th« Helvetii sent ambassadors to Caesar, to say, ^c. — Caes. 1. Hypothetical Sentences. § 424. An hypoth tical sentence consists of two parts, tho Protdais and the Apoddsis : the former containing the supposition or ground of argument, the latter the con- clusion based upon it. (1). Hypothetical sentences with the Indicative. — If both members of the sentence deal with facts, either actual or assumed for the pui-pose of argument, both their Verbs are in the Indicative Mood : as, Si est boni consdliB forre opsm patriae, est etiam bonorum civiuai. 166 THK SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. i4U. etc., // it ia the duty ofagocki oontul to render help to hit comiiry, it n (Mo the duty oj good citizeia, etc.— Oie. Si tdnuit, eimnfulnt. If it thundered, it also lightened. (2). Hypothetical sentences with the Subjunctive.— -Tint if the sentence implies only that something may or might happen, or might have happened, both its Verbs are put in the bubjunotive : as, Si 7iegem, mentiar, If I were to deny it, I should teU an untruth. —Cio. *r- T"t.!1J ^"^, «». Jilltor aentias, You, if you were in my place, would think differently.— Ter. Ndcassem jam te verbgrTbiis. nisi Iratus estem, I would have beaten you to death, tf I uere not angry.— Cio. 426. The Present and Perfect Tenses of the Subjunctive are used with the above Conjunctions when it is indicated that a thing may possibly happen or inay have happened in Pr©- sent or Future Time : as, Me dies, vox, latfira, def Iciant, ti hoc nunc voclftrari vmm, Time, voice, strength, would fail me if I were to purpose expressing now, etc.— _ Si scXeris {Perfect) aspldem occulta latere uspiam, imprSbe /ec^m nisi monueris altCrura ne assldeat. If you should have become aware thai an asp were lying concealed in someplace, you would be actinq wronqlu if you did not warn your neighbour not to sit there.~Cio. Obs. In such cases we in English often use a Pott Tense Subjunctive, and translate the LaUn Present by should, would, were, &c., as in the above examples. § 427. The Past Tenses of the Subjunctive are used with the above Conjunctions when a thing is conceived of as net actually taking place, whether now (Past-Imperfect), or in the Pas« (Past-Perfect): as, Sapientia non expHmtur simbJiefficSret, Wisdom would not he coveted ij it answered no end. — Cic. {8^)^ lino praelio victus {esset) Alexander, bello victus esset, Coth- queredm om batik, Alexander would have been conquered in the (entire) war. — Liv. ^ ^ § 432. The Subjunctive is also used with or without a Conjunction, to signify that an hypothesis is assumed or granted for the purpose of argument (Subjunctivus Con- cessivus) : as, Malus civis CJn. Caroo fuit :—fuerit aliis ; tibi quando esse coepit. Chtaeus Carbo was a bad citizen, was hei (Granted thaV' he was so to others, when did he begin to be so to you f— Cic. ^1 /5\"^'' "^ J^» sit, tamuu non potes hoc praedicare, Tet (qrantina) that tt M so, yet you cannot affirm tfiis.— Cic Cic. ^'<,^^^^,*lmmmmm. 6 438. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 167 2. The Subjunctive of Doubt or Uncertainty. ^.^Quum incertus essom ubi esse,, As I was uncertain where ym were^ whitft ^""fT^ Questians.--.Kn Indirect Question is one mmtZr.' '^ ^''°f ^?"^' "^ ^^'^^ ^« dependent upon ^me word signifying doubt or perplexity in the sentence. &uch a question is expressed with the Subjunctive Mood • as ^ 2S^.;^r ,;r^"" ""^'' ^"^ " ^'^ ««'«- ^^^^^ -«'^ (Hero the Direct Question would be, Qualis ot animus? S 408^ Uioggnos (lisputare wjlebat, nuanto reeem Persamm vifr. f«..+,-.«- / .rl^l*"^l?."'' ^«rt Pl^*«°«.' ^«"^£«*« «» recto dix^rim prineTnem >hp.f lij^llJj.iJ'*' "^fVpJfl §450. THE SUBJtJNCTIVE MOOD. 169 f if ^^!i 7®!? °?^^ ^ ^^""^ °^ ^^'^^^'^^^ i« expressed, and followed by the Subjunctive either with or without vi : (1.) (^to, Iwish, is generally construed with ut and the Subjunctive (less frequently with the Infinitive) : as, ^;n?K"ff '° currum patris tod^retur, He (Phaethm) desired that he might be taken up into his father's chariot.~Cic. (2.) V61o, Nolo, and Malo, are frequently found with ut and the Subjunctive; also very often with ut omitted : as, ^nf^f^"" *®- ^^P'®°^ hoBtismftuat, quam stulti cives laudent, I had Z^L « WM6 e«67»2/ should fear ym, than that foolish citizens should „^J^^\^<^^»^^^^ in judicium pOtentiam affSrat, I would not have an accuser bring personal influence with him into a court of justice.- do. 4. The Subjunctive of Purpose or Result. § 449. The Subjunctive is used with the following Con- junctions, fit (iiti), qu5, that, in order that ; ne (or fit ne), lest, m order that . . . not; qma, quomlnus, that noty to denote Pur- pose and Result. § 450. The Conjunction ut, that, in order that, so that, is used with the Subjunctive Mood to denote either Purpose or Uesult: as, (a.) Purpose. Romani ab aratro abduxerunt Ciucinnatum. ut dictator esset, Tlie Homans fetched Cmcinnatus from the plough in order to be dictator.— Gic. *,wJ^/lf Oreetem se esse dixit ut pro eo n^cdretnr, Pylades affirmed hvmelf to be Orestes, m order that he might be put to death in his place.— Obs. Under this head falls the Subjunctive with ut after Verbu oi command. \ng, peramdmg, atrivinff, wishing, &c. (see § 451). (h.) Result. Tarquinius sic Servium dillgebat, ut is ejus vulgo Imberetur filius Tarqmmwiwm so attached to Servius, that the latter teas currently re- garded as hts son. — Cic. * Tempgrantia sedat appgtitiones et efflcit ut hae lectae rfttioni pureant. Temperance calms the appetites and causes thai they submit to right reason.—Cic. '' Saepo fit ut, ii qui debeaut, non respondeant ad tempus, It often occurs thai those who owe money, do not meet their liabilities at the time. — l^ic. Si haec nuntiatio vera non est, sgQuttur ut falsa sif. If this, *,r"»(H ^itionitiuottrue, it follows that it is fahe.~Cio. " * ^ fcM. L. G, 170 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. § 151. §460. X Thrasybulo contlgit ut patriam llhStavet, It fell to the lot of Thra' syhulus to deliver his country. — Nep. Oba, The phrases, sequitur, it follows ; restat, it remains ; necesse est, it it necessary ; aequiim, juatum est, it is right or Just ; and the like, take for the n»OHt part, either ut and the Subjunctive, or an Infinitive Mood (see § 500). § 451. Tit and ne are used with the Subjunctive after Verbs signifying to command, advise, request, exhort, endeavour ; ut in a positive, ne in a negative sense : as, Civltati persufisit ut de fintbus suis exlrent. He {Orgetorix) persuaded the community to leave their own territories.— Gaea. Te hortor ut lios libros de philosophia sttldiose Ugas, I urge yon to read these books, of mine on philosophy.— Gic. PrCcor ne me desSras, I beg you not to forsake me. — Cic. Ohs. 1. This Subjunctive with ut is usually translated by the Infinitive in English. The Latin Infinitive never expresses a purpose. Ohs. 2. Jttbeo, I order ; vdto, / forbid ; conor, I attempt ; and, sometimes, nTto», I strive, take the Infinitive ; as, Jtlhet nos Pythius Apollo noscore nosmet ipsos, The Pythian Apollo bids us " know ourselves." — Cic. Lex pgregrlnum vStat in murum ascendSre, The law forbids a foreigner to go up upon the walls. — Cic. Ter sunt conati impon^re Peiio Ossam, Thrice they essayed to pile Os.in on Pelion. — Virg. Jugurtha Cirtam irrump^re nltttur, Junuttha endeavours to force an entrance into Cirta. — Sail. Obs. 3. ImpiSro is occasionally found with tlie Accusative and Infinitive : as, Ipsos abduci imp^rabat, He ordered the men themselves to he led atcay. -—Cic. § 453. Quo. — The Conjunction quo, in order that ; that thereby, is used with the Subjunctive to denote a Purpose : as, CoiTupisse dicitur Cluentius judicium pecunia, quo Inlmioum suum iiinocentem condemndret, Cluentius is said to have bribed the court, that thereby it might condemn his enemy though innocent. — Cic. Especially when there is a Comparative Adjective in its clause : as, Legem brgvem esse Oportet, quo ft.cflius ab impSritis tSneatur, A law ought to be short, in ordt. that it may the mme easily be grasped by the unlettered.— Gic. (Here quo = ut eo.) Ohs. 1 . But quo is not used like ut to denote a result, Ohs. 2. Coneerning non quo, not that, see § 487. Obs. 1. § 454. Ne is used with the Subjunctive to denote a Pur- pose, ut being omitted ; it is equivalent to ut non, quo non. Nolo € plauder, h Gallin Hens and tliey may ? §456. ne qu ne ul] ne un ne U8i neciibj necuni nequai Caesare siatuSret, E too severe d Circumi carefully ro quarter. — I §457. ut nemo, v Ex hoc < it foUows th Demostl retur, By en have been a § 460. . the apprej not occur : Timebam \Mng8 which Timor E( was great fee Eutr. Pater ter, the nations i again.— Hot. Omnes la iJte ailpoesi Obs. But tences : TIme( Nou 1 fear thu § 460. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 171 /% may not he hurt by thecold!-cT^ """^'' '" '''^''* '^'"' § 456. Similarly, when a P«,pose is signified, ^e find ne quis instead of ne ullus ne unquam „ „ ne usquam „ „ neciibi (i. e. ne alicubi) necunde («. e. ne alicunde), nequando (i. e. ne aliquando), ut nemo, that no one. ut nuUus, that nme. ut nunquam, that never. ut nusquam, )., , >r/ia< nowhere. te)id8 ambassadors to Caesar {saying) thai he tvi«hed to speak with him on these points. — Cacs. § 467. (B.) The subordinate Verbs in Keiative sentences, used by the original speaker in the Indicative Mood, are turned into the Subjunctive in the (/ratio obliqua : as, Caesar legates cum his mandatis mittit, .. haec esse quae ab eo postularet, Caesar sends ambassadors with these instructions, . . that the fol- lowing were the demands he made of him, &c. — Caes. (Direct form : Haec sunt quae a te postulo.) Apud Hypanim fliivium AristutCles ait, bestiolas quasdam naaci, quae uuum cuem vlvant. On the banks of the river Bog, Aristotle tells us thore are insects produced which live only one day. ~Cic. (Direct form : Sunt bestiolae quaedam quae unum diem vivunt.) Obn. But if a statement of the writer's be interwoven with the oratio obliqua, it of course stands in the Indicative ; as, QuiB pStest esse tam aversus a vero, qui n§get haec omnia, quae videmus, de6rumimmortfil;.i.n potestate administrari, TFho can be such a stranger to truth, as to deny that all these things, wlxich we see, are managed by the jm-jer of the immoriat. God: ?— Cic. § 468. _ (C.)^ Questions Lr, msferred to the oratio obliqua take the Subjunctive Mood; being dependent upon rogavit, or some such word, expressed or understood (§ 434) : as, FarSreomnea tribuni plebis .. " quidnam id rei esset?" AU the tribunes of the commons were furious: {they asked) "What did that mean? — Li v. (Direct question : Quidnam id rei est ?) Quid de praeda Sciendum ccnserent. What did they think should he done about the spoil ? — Liv. (Direct question : Quid de praeda faciendum censetis ?) § 469. But when the Interrogative form is merely rhe- torical, the question containing its own answer, and being therefore equivalent to a direct statement, it is usually ex- pressed with the Accusative and Infinitive ; as, " Si vCtgris contf- leliae oblivisci vellet, num 6tiam rgcentium injuri- aruui memurmm depGnSre posse?" "Even if he were witting {he mid) to forget an ancient affront, could he banish the recollection of recent injuries? — Caes. (Here, num depongre posse = nor: depongre posse.) Interrogabat . . " quando ausuros exposc6re rgmfidia. nisi . . etc " Ue asked " When would they venture to demaim redress, if not . etc ?*" — lac. •' * {Quando ausuros = nunquam ausuros.) Liv"^^ l^icquam esse sQperbius ' Could anythi;uf he more arrogant *~ {An quiequam esse = nihV :^8Sd.) §476. §470. to the or some sue as, (Orare" assistance i " Sin 1 Helvetion against the — Caes, §471. for the 1 obliqua : \ Caesar multltudln that could \ (Direct comp. § 48 " Intel] annos tecti what tlie ur over their h (Direct 6. U § 474. junctive ( not simpl §475. lowed bj belongs c Haec qu should see tl {Qui vid Nee qu disciplinam not first kai {Qui nor Obs. To know. § 476. stating th O fortu: inmnSris,0 J a fTuTner io , §476. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 175 'Nulli in Gallia vacant agri, qui dari possint. §470. (D.) Comma/? I^J >^^^'^ i^ &^ 180 THE INFINITIVE MOOD. §50i Non ante fiiiltum est proelium, quam trtbunus milltum interfectm est, The battle was not brought to a dose till a tribune of soldiers had been slain. — Liv. Ante aliquanto quam tu ndtus es, A good while before you were bom.— Cic. Beceaait post annum quartum quam expnlsuH (rat. He died four years after he had been banish^. — Nep. (6.) With Subjunctive. Prius Placeutiam pervenere quam satis sdret Hannibal ab Ticino prSfectos, They reached Placentia before JSannibul was well aware that they had left the Ticinus. — Liv. Interfuit pugnae navali apud S&lamlna, quae facta est priux quam poena llberdretur. He was present at the naval battle of Salamis, which was f aught before he wa^ liberated from his penalty. — Nep. § 502. Quamvis, however much, and licet, although, used con- cessively, govern the Subjunctive : as, Quamvis El^sios miretur Graecia campos, However much Greece may admire her Elysian plains. — Virg. Quavtvis sit magna (exspectatio), tamen earn vinces, Though expec- tation be ever so high, you will yet c^o beyond it. — Cic. Ltcet ipsa vltium sit ambitio, frgc^^uenter tamen causa virtutum est, Though ambition in itself is a fault, yet it is often the cause of virtues.— Quint. Vita brgvis est ltcet supra mille annos exeat, Life is short even if it should exceed a thousand years. — Sen. § 503. Quanquam, etsi, etiamsi, although, take either the Indicative or Subjunctive, according to the fundamental distinction between those Moods (§ 421) : as, Quanquam, — etsi pridre foedSre stai-etur,— satis cautum Srat de Saguntinis, Alt1wugh,—even if the former treaty were adhered to,— sufficient security had been taken for the Saguntines. — Liv. Quanquam festinas, non est mora longa, Though thou ar.t in haste, it would involve no long delay. — Hor. Sed quanquam urgent, nee virtutes nee vitia cresc6re, attamen, etc.. But although they (the Stoics) should deny {it), affirming that neither virtuts nor vices increase, yett &c. — Cic. Chaptek XL VI. — The Infinitive Mood. § 504. The Infinitive Mood is an indeclinable verbal Sub- stantive, capable of being used as a Nominative or an Accusative only. For the other Cases, the Gerund takes the place of the Infinitive. §610. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 181 1. The Infinitive as Subject. § 506. The Infinitive is used as Subject chiefly in con- nexion with such quasi-impersonal Verbs as jfivat, deleotat, {it) delights ; or such phrases as pulohrum, decorum est, (it) is fine, becoming, n n Amicitia, nisi inter bSnos, esse non pdtest. Friendship can only exist between the good, — Cic. Optat arare cabaUus, The nag loould like to draw the plouqh.— Hoi. (cf. §447). Dlci beatus ante Qbitum nemo debet. No one ought to be called Mmni before his decease. — Ov. Caesar bellum cum Gerraanis gSrSre constUuit, Caesar resolved to make war ■upon the Germans. — Caes. RiiliP § 619. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 183 § 513. When a predicative Adjective or Substantive is atfached to the Infinitive Mood in the above cases, it agrees in case with the Subject of the Infinitive : as, Ubi v6les pSter esse, Xbi eato, When you choose to be the father, then you must be so. — Plaut. Capio in tantis reipubllcae pericalis, me non dissclutum vtderi, I am dedrom in such perils as menace the state, that I may not seem lax.— Cic. Lteuit esse otioso Themistocli, Themistocles might have been inactive — Cic. Obs. The Imperfect and not the Perfect Infinitive (as in Fnglish), is used after the above Verbs : thus, I wished to have been comul, is Volui me consulem esse, not fuisse : see last example. § 514. Verbs signifying to begin, continue^ or leave off; also to he or hecorm accustomed, govern the Infinitive : as, Inclpe, parve puer, matrem cognoscSre risu. Begin, little child, to know thy mother by her smile!— Yirg. niud jam mirdri deslno. That I am now ceasing to wonder o<.— Cic. 5. The Infinitive in exciamationB. § 516. The Infinitive is used in exclarof^'ons to denote surprise, without any preceding Verb being expressed : as, Mene desistSre vJctam, {To think that) I should give over as van- auished! — Virg. 6. Historical Infinitive. § 517. The historical writers often use the Imperfect Infinitive instead of the corresponding tenses of the Indi- cative : as, Intgrea Manlius in Etruria plebem solltcltdre, Meanwhile Manlius in Etruria was stirring up the common people to insurrection. — Sail. Suo qnisque m6tu pgrictila metiri. Each one was measuring the extent of ihe danger by his mm. fears. — Sail. 7. Circumlocution for the Future Infinitive. § 518. Instead of the Future Infinitive, whether in the Active or Passive Voice, we often find fore ut with the Sub- junctive : as, Clamabant homines, f ike ut ipsi se dii immortales ulciscSrentur, TJie men exclaimed, that the immortal gods themselves would avenge them. — Cic. Especially of course when a Verb wants the Supine : as, Spero/Jre ut contingat id nobis, I hope such apiece of good fortune may fall to tts.— Cic. § 519. Infinitive in Oratio Obliqua: see § 466. 184 PAUTlOIl'LEa. § 520. (526. Chapter XL VII. — Participles. § 520. The Participle expresses the same notion as the Verb to which it belongs, but in the form of an Adjective. It does not contain the Copula (§ 213, Ohs. 1) involved in the Verb, and is chiefly used in the way of Apposition : as, Dionyaiust cultros mStuens tonsoris, caiidenti carbone sibi adurebat o4pillum, Dionysiua, being a/raid of barbere' razors, singed hia hair with a live coal. — Cic. § 621. Active Participles govern the same Case as tho Verb to which they belong : as, Ipsa sua Dido concldit usa mSnu, Dido fell, by (Lit., using) her own hand. — Ov. Puer bfine slbifldens, A youth trusting well to himself .— do. Ohs. When a Participle is used as an Adjective denoting disposition or oapa^ city for, it governs the Genitive : see § 277. § 522. The Latin Verb is deficient in its Participles, having in the Active Voice only an Imperfect and a Future ; and in the Passive only a Perfect and the Gerundive Parti- ciple of Necessity/. Thus the Active Voice has no Perfect Participle and the Passive no Imperfect. Ohs. 1. Deponents are the on-y Verbs in Latin which form a Perfect Parti- ciple Active : as, Sdeptus, having acquired ; Qsus, having used, &c. (See § 103.) Ohs. 2. The lack of an Imperfect Participle Passive is in some cases supplied by the Gerundive : as, Multi in iquis parandis adhtbent cQram, in dtnicis eUgendis negUgentes sunt, Many take puins in getting horses (Lit. horses being got), but are careless in choosing friends. —Cic. This construction of the Gerundive is explained in § 537. § 523. The Imperfect Participle Active represents a thing as going on at the time spoken of : as, Ourio ad fScum sSdenti magnum auri pondus Samnites quum atta- lissent, rgptldiati sunt, WJien the Samnites brought Curius as he was sitting at his fireside a great weight of gold, their offers were rejected.— Ciu. Scripta tua jam diu exspectans non audeo tamen flagltare, While expecting for a long while past your writings, I yet do not venture to importune you for them. — Cic. Obs. Instead of the Imperfect Participle, quum with the Past-Imperfect is often used : as, Audivi quuTrt diceret, I heard him saying. — Cic. 524. The Perfect Participle Active represents a Person as having done something at the time spoken of. It is found only in Deponents and in certain Active Verbs. The i which hj Audeo, Oandeo, S^leo, Fido (& CO] Jtlro, Coono, Prandeo, Ntlbo, Odi, §525. in an Ac the princ Adipifl CSmIt< Confit HStioi Ezpgri Mgd!t< Testor MSdgr PSpiilc Partio: P&cisoi § 526. is supplie (A.) (B.) CognXto heard of Ca Dextrd right hand. Epamin ipse gravi v 'Epaminondi Mantinea, c shield were j {526. PARTICIPLES. 185 i3\® J°^^°^^"^ ^® ^ ^^^* ^^ *^® principal Active Verbs which have a Perfect Participle with an Active sense :~ Audeo, I dare, Oandeo, J rejoice, S5Ieo, J am wont, Fido (& comp.), I trust. Jilro, Coono, Prandeo, Ntlbo, Odi, I swear, I dine, I breakfast, I am married, I hate. auBna, gavIsuB, sSUtus, flsns, jUratus, oosn&tuB, pranBos, nupta., osns having dared, having rejoiced, rejoidng. having been wont, having trusted, having sworn, having dined, having breakfasted, having married, having hated, hating. ^ § 525. Some Deponents use their Perfect Participle both m an Active and a Passive sense : the following are aiaontr the principal ones that do so : — Adl^isoor, I attain to, Sdgptus, having attained, or hav- ing leen attained. oSmltatns, &c. confessns, &o. mensus. expertus. mgditatus. testatus. mSdSr&tus. pSptUatns. partitas, pactas. CSmXtor, Confiteor, mstior, Ezpgrior, M^ditor, Testor, MSdSror, PSpiilor, Partior, F&cisoor, I accompany, I confess, I measure, I try, I practise, I call to witnei^, I control, I devastate, I divide, I bargain, § 526. The want of a Perfect Participle in other Verbs is supplied in two ways : (A.) By the Perfect Participle Passive in agreement with its Substantive as an Ablative Absolute. (B.) By quum with the Subjunctive Mood. (A.) Cogntto Caesaris adventu, Ariovistus legates ad eum mittit, Having heard of Caesar's arrival, Ariovistus sent ambassadors to him.— C&ea. Dextrd Herciiles data 5men se acclpere ait, Hercules offering his right hand, said he accepted the amen.—lAy. (B.) _. Epaminondas quum vleisset LricgdaemSnios apud Mantineara, atque ipse gravi vulnCre se exantmari vlderet, quaeslvit, salvusne esse cllpeus, 'Epaminondas, having conquered the Lacedaemonians in the battle o_f Mantinea, and seeing himself to be dying of a bad wound, asked if his shield were safe. — Cic. (For more examples see § 382.^ 18G THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE PARTICIPLE. § 527. §530. TH § 627. The Future Participle Active is used to denote (1) siixxTplQ futurity ; (2) intention or purpose : as, Delli raOrlturo, Delliua, who art {one day) to die. — Hor. Pereeus rfidiit, belli casuiii do iutegro tentatunw, Penseua returned, intending to try the chances of war afresh. — Liv. Ohs. The Future Participle occurs most frequently in combination with the Terb sum. § 528. The Neuter o^ the i*erfect Participle is sometimes used as an Abstract Substantive : as, Nam priusquam inctpias, conmlbo ; et ubi consttluSris, mature facto Opus est, For before you make a beginning, you want cminsel ; and wheti you have taken counsc', you want prompt action. ^Sall. Nihil pemt ueque mSdSrdti habere. They exercised no reflection, no restraint. — Sail. § 530. Frequent use of Participles. — Participles are very often used in Latin, so as to avoid the use of Conjunctions where several predications are united in a sentence : ac- Victa pietas jacet. Piety is vanquished and lies prostrate. — Ov. i«. Rursus in obliquum verso perrumpit ardtro, A gain he turns the plough, and breaks up {the soil) in a cross direction. — Virg. Tyrtaeus carmlna compSsXta exereitui rScItavit, Tyrtaeua composed songs and repeated them to the army. — Justin. Chapter XL VIII. — The Gerund and Gerundive Participle. § 531. The Gerund is a Verbal Substantive used in all cases except the Nominative and Vocative : as, regendi, of ruling ; regendo, to, for, or by ruling ; ad regenlum, for the pur- pose of ruling. Ohs. Instead of a Nominative Case of the Gerund, the Infinitive Mood is used (see § 505). § 532. The Cases of Geninds have the same construction as the corresponding Cases of ordinary Substantives : as, Gen.— Omnis Iffquendi (§ 263) el§gantia expGlitur scientia litgrarum, Every kind of elegance of speech is made more refined by an acquaintance icith literature. — Oic. Vat—Aqua, nitrosa utilis est btbendo (§ 298), Water full of natron is useful for drinking.~FU.u. Acc.—Bi^ye tempus aetatis satis longum est ad bSne hCnesteque nvendum (§ 248), The brief time of life is long enough for living virtuously and honourably. — Cic. Abl.—Oi speaking. — < Ohs. The others § 533. ' the power Parslmui fdmllidri mi expense; or DiogSnee Diogenes pre and the false § 534. 'J necessary o meaning, ^ from a Di sfcruction :- (A.) (B.)] (C.)] § 535. (. rundive ag Diligentif Ohs. Such (Lucr.), § 536. (] Accusative the Nomin RSsistendi Corpori «t Utendum We shall have Ohs. 1. In Verb to Obs. 2. Tl le §53fi. THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE PARTICIPLE. 187 J W.— Orator in diomuio (§ 331) exerdtatuH, An oratoi- praetited in speaking. — Oic. Obs. The Accusative Case of the Gerund is used only with ITenositions : otherwise the Imperfect Infinitive is used : see § 506 aqq. § 533. The Gerund as a Verbal Substantive still retains the power of governing its proper case as a Verb : as, Parslmunia est scientia vitandi sumptHs supervdcuos aut ara re famlhari mOdgrate Utendi, Economy is the science of avoiding needless expense; or the art of using one's income with moderation.—Sen. _ DiogSnes dicebat, artem se tradCre vera ac falsa dijUdloandi, JJiogeries professed to impart tU art of distinguishing between the true and the false. — Cic. § 534. The Gerundive Participle signifies that a thing is necessary or proper to be done. It is always Passive in meaning, whether coming from a Verb strictlv Passive or from a Deponent. -It has the following modes of con- struction : — (A.) It is used in the Nominative Case along with the Verb est, aunt, etc., in agreement with a Substantive, to signify that something ought to he done. (B.) It is used (impersonally) in the Neuter Gender along with the Verb est, with the same force as in the former case. (C.) It is used in all Cases except the Nominative or Vocative, in agreement with a Substantive, as equivalent to a Gerund governing the Accusa- tive.— Note. Tlie agent or doer in both {A) and {B) is put in the Dative Case. § 535. (A.) If the verb governs an Accusative, the Ge- rundive agrees with the Nominative of its substantive : as, Diligentia est cdlenda. We must practise diligense.— Cic. Obs. Such a construction as poenas tYmendum est, we must fear punishment (Lucr.), is exceptional, and is borrowed from the Greek. § 536. (B.) If the verb governs any other case than the Accusative the Gerundive is used impersonally with est in the Nominative Singular Neuter : as, RSsistendum sSnectuti est, We must resist old-age.— Cic. Corpori suhvSniendum est. We must aid the body.— Cic. Utendum erit verbis lis, quibus jam consuetudo nostra non utitiu-, We shall have to use words which our present usage does not employ.— Cic. Obs. 1. In such cases the Gerundive Participle governs the same Case as the Verb to which it belongs. (See examples.) Obs. 2. The Dative of the Agent is frequently omitted. (See examples.) p 188 TH'S SUPINES. §531 § 537. (C.) The Gerundive is frequently used instead of the Gerund, when the verb governH tlie Accusative. The following changes then take place :— 1. The Acousativr is put in the same case as the Gerund. 2. The Gerund is changed into the Gerundive. 3. The Gerundive being an Adjective agrees with its Substantive in gender, number, and case : thus Are puCroB edOcandi difftcllis est becomes Are pugrorum edOcandorum difflcllis est ' in the following way: (1.) The Substantive pueros is put m the same case as the Gerund educandi ; consequently pmrorum. (2.) The Gerund educandi is changed into the Gerundive educandus, a, urn. (3.) The Gerundive is made to agree with puerorum in gender, number, and case ; con- sequently, educandorum. For example : NihU Xenophonti tam regale vWetur, quam htttdium aqri cMlendL Nothing aeema to Xenophm 8o princely aa the pursuit of tilling the noil— Regalufl rmnetidi officii causa crflciatum sQbiit voluntarium. Requlm jor the sake of keeping to his duty submitted to voluntary torture.— Cic. ^^ti TJ^* ^^'"""'l is used in preference to the Gerundive, when the use of the latter would cause any ambiguity, especially when the Object of the Verbal Substantive is a neuter Adjective : as, (Pars hanesti) in trtbuendo mum cuique versatur, Apart of virtue con- atats m yivmg to every one his own. — Cic. § 538. The Dative of the Gerundive is very often used with its Substantive to denote a Purpose or HesuU (§ 299) : as, ^wS?r./''?'^ ''^f^^'l ''''^/^^"^ ^^rdga7tdo babuit. ValeriuB the conml held the elections for choosing him afresh colleague.— Lvf. DScemvIri UgXbus scribundis, Decemvirs for framing u code of laws — Chapter XLIX.— The Supines. § 542. The two Supines in um and u are properly the Accusative and Ablative Cases of Verbal Substantives of the Fourth Declension. § 543. The Supine in um is used only after Verbs signify- ing raotion, and denotes a Purpose. It is thus equivalent to ut with the Subjunctive : as, Fftbins Pictor Delphos ad OractUiim misms est satatum qulbus prS- |M4 oYbufl deo!: oracle; in gods.— hiy CahUui —Cic. Themis Jive at Arg § 544. Manner, pleasant ; mlr&bllis, denote in Quid 61 tentiis gri whether in ments and Id diet doing.~hi Nffas ( Oha. 1. Verb P« Ohs. 2. Moo( Ml mfmmm HMiMpN P pUdet : as, Plidet dictu, I am ashamed as I say it ! — Agr. 32. Ohs. 2. The Supine in u may often be translated by the English Infinitive Hood : as, MTr&blle dictu, Marvellotta to relate I — Virg. T""--- the ( ii>o ) §730. PART III. — PROSODY. KXCEI'I togetfutr. Oht. 1. brcal Obi. 2. and fruiti Obs. 3. with § 725. Prosody treats of the Quantity of SyllableB and Afetre, or tho laws of Verso. Obg. Ih-osodij Is a Greek word (Trpo<7(f.8,'a), which signifles literally the tone or Accent of a syllable. Chapter L. — Quantity. § 726. The Quantity of a Syllable is either lone C") short (-), or doubtful (^^). '^ ^ ^' (A.) GENERAL RULES. § 727. All_diphthongs are long : as, aiirum, gold, poena, punishment, cui, to whom. ExcEPTioN.-Prao ia composition ia usuaUy short before a rowel • as, prfte-acutus, sharpened at the end. Obs. 1. A vowel arising from a diphthong remains long : as, occldo, to kill, from caedo, to strike ; con-clQdo, to shut up, from claudo, to shut. Obs. 2. Some Greek diphthongs are shortened : as, p8esis (irocijau). plat^a (n-AttTeia) as well as platea. ■ i, y <^ § 728. All contracted syllables are long : as, cogo from c6Sgo, to collect, bobus from bovibus, to or by oxen, junior from jiivenior, younger, prudens from yrovidenB, possessed of § 729. A vowel is long by position, when it is followed by two or more consonants, by a double consonant (x, z) or by J ; as, mensa, a table, dux, a leader, Amazon, an Amazon, 6jus, ofhi7n. Oii. In Prosody, quantity is for the sake of convenience regarded as belonjr- ing only to Vowels. Thus in the Word nQx (« nut), root nflc, the vowel « ia said to be ong (by position): though strictly speaking, it is tho tylhaie which is lengthened by the addition of the consonant s, the vowel rflaimng its quantity as in other cases ; nac-i, ntto-em, nttc-os, etc. Obi.i. EXOEP'I luitunilly h or pfitriH, Alius ; cl, Obs. 1, and I I'rOgi Obs 2. ncrci Obi. 3. with \ whak S 7;i0. short ; m intervene ExcEFr 1. 8. 8. 4. 5. 6 7. 8. 9. 10. § 7.'10. QUANTITY. 191 KxcElTios 1. BijiiKiiH, yoked two together, quadrljugUH, yokeil fmr together. Ohs. 1. Qu ti a •Innlc connon'^nt: hcpie, llqua, uiater. i/ la a limple breathing : hence, Hdhuc, an yet. Ob%. 2. A Hyllublo In alno lonfr by ponitlon wb' u one oomionant end* a word, and another connonunt begins the next word : as, In nvare, into the soa ; fruitilr vita, he eiijoyi life. Obs. 3. nut if tt word ends ill a short vowel, and the following word begins with two consonants, the vowel uattnlly rcmtiins short : aa, In solio I'hocbus Claris lucCntd smilragdis. — Ov. Obs, 4. But a short vowel rarely stands before sc, «m, sp, sq, and st. Exception 2. Before n inuto and either of the liquids I or r, a. vowel luitunilly ahort iKJcoines doubtful : hh, Hftple x or dilplox, twi,j\>ld, niltris or pfitriH, of a father. It generully remuins short before «, nsi Atius ; cl, as assflclr. ; and/, as ixuA\\^VL\\%,Jlnwing-wUh-hone\j. ObH. 1, It is only in Greek words that a vowel remainN slio-t before a mute and either of the liquids m or » ; as, TCcmessa or Tdcmcssa, I'rftcne (or I'rogne), cycniis (or cygnus), a swan. Obs 2. A vowel natumlly long remains long before a mute and a liquid : as, ilcrcH from ilcor, sharp. Oht. 3. In composition, if one syllable ends with a mute, and the other begfno with a liquid, the vowel is long by position : as, 6b-ruo, not 5b-ruo, to ovet' <• %vhelin, sub-latum, not stlb-lutum, lifted up, S 780. A vowel followed by another vowel is usually short : as, pius, pious, fl6o, to weep, puer, a hoy : or if /t intervonos between the vowels, as tr&ho, veho. ExCKPTioNS. The following vowels are long before another vowel • 1. The a in the old Genitive of tlio First Declension : as, aquai. 2. The a and e of proper names in -iiius, -eius : as. Cuius, Pompeius (Cajus, Pompejus). 8. The e in the Genitive and Dative Singular of the Fifth Declension, wlien a vowel precedes ; as, diei : bi.-l rfii and fldgi except in archaic poets. 4. The e in the Interjection eheu. 5. The i in the Genitive alius (but always short in alterlus). la the other Genitives in ius, the i is long in prose, but doubtful in poetry : as, illius, ipsius, unius. 6 The i in fin when not followed by r : as, fio, fiebam, fiam, but flerem, fieri. 7. The i in dia (STa), divine. 8. The i in Diana is doubtful : Diana and Diana. 9. The in the Inteijection ohe is doubtful : ohe and Ohe. 10. All vowels long in the original Greek words : as, aer {'a^p), Aeneas (Alvdas), Alexandria (^AKt^dvSpita) Briseia {Bp^ari'ts). 192 PROSODY. §731. §74A. n § 731. Radical Vowels. — No rules can be given for the quantity of Root Vowels, which is only to be learnt from the Dictionary : as, levis, light, ISvis, o^ooth. lego, / pick, read, lego, I depute, etc. § 732. The Root Vowel has sometimes been lengthened in the Present Tense : as, duco, I lead, root diic (compare dux, ducis : educo, 1 educate) ; dico, I say, root die (compare index, -dicis, maledious, etc.). § 733. The Vowels used in connecting two or more roots ware sliort : as, regifugium (name of a festival), re^f icus, kingly (rex, fugo, facio) ; opifer, aid-bringing (ops, fero) ; laniger, njool-bearing (lana, gero) ; magniloquus, grandly speak- ing (magnus, loquor), etc. iJha, In. levainentum, instrumeutura, lenlnientum, etc., a, «, » are Stem Vowels. § 784. Derivative or Compound words retain the quantity of the words from which they are derived : as, ggr-ebam, ger-eny, lani-ger, from ger-o., reg-ius, reg-ina, reg-i-fugium, from rex, reg-is. Exceptions witii some others. cflrulis (sella), tegala, sedes, Iflcerna, seeius, prortlba, jiicundug, humanus, sfipor, pejfiro and dejSro, the curule chair, from currus. a tile, „ tggo. « eeat, „ 86d-eo. a lantern, „ luc-eo. otherwise, „ sficua. match-mcker, „ nubo. pleasant, „ jflvo. human, „ hOtio. «^^. „ sopio. compounds of juro. Oba. 1. t;omc exceptions are rather apparent than real: as, index, -dlcis an informer; praedfco, I affirm; mSiedlcus, evil-speuking (all with i short), compared with dloo, / say, addico, / assign to, etc. iiere aU the words nwst alike be referred to the root die, which is lengthened in the Present Tense of dlco, but keeps its natural quantity in the other derivatives. Oha. 2, In cognltum, agnftum ('-om notnn:), the Prfiflx has led to the abbre- viation of the Vowel. Compare c^pio, acctpio, etc., a being a fuller voweJ 6 surd than ». § 735. In dissyllabic Perfects and Supines the first syl- lable is long : as, lavo, lavi, l5tum, to wash. video, vidi, visum, to see. moveo, movi, motum, to move. jiivo, juvi, jtitum, to assist. ExcEi'Tiv>NS. 1. A vowel before o vowel remaiiw short : ae, rai 2. 8. § 736. : short: as to touch ; c § 737. ^ oul, /ar 0^ proficiscor distance, pi great-grand doubtful ii spring, pre prCpello, t{ procedo, to _ § 738. I diisertus, el % 739. K unahle ; ne abominable -: homo), no c § 740. to shut up. § 741. Si §742. R concerns (bu § 743. Ve § 744. M ^", si, tu, tt EXCEPTIOJ peg (reaps?), p Sing. Fern, an SM. L. G. KBW 193 5 ^*'^' QUANTITY. 2. The foUowing Perfects have the first syllable short • Blhi, di5di, fai, tiili, Steti, stiti, ftdi, soldi. . For the meanings, see §§ 149. sqj. 8. The following Supines have the first syUable short : Datum, ratum, satum. rfltum, Itum, rftum, lltum, situm (qnlftum). For the meanings, see §§ 149. sqq. From sto conies statum ; from sisto comes statmn. JJ,^^' ^^^ fir«* syllable of the reduplicated Perfect is L ?.,! A ^' P-""??'? ^'■'''^ "^T""' *" ^^"^ ' *^^%i froi^ tango, to touch I cecidi from caedo, to cut. ^ oJ Inl' J^® ^f^^^ ^'° i^ '^'"^ ^^ procella, a storm, pro- cnl far off, profanus, profane, profestus, not kept as a MMav pj forscor to set o.^ profiteor, to profess, profugio, tofletfa distance, pvofandus, deep, profando, to pour foHh ryTLlZs gr^a^grandson, iproj^itius, prop^^^^ P^S^rv/s, warUonThis dOTibttul m prociaro, to manage anotlier's affairs, prSpago off. sprn^ propago ^0 pro;,a^a^«, prgpino, #o drink to anothi picv^llo, to push forward: itislong'^in all other words ai' procedo, to go forward, procurro, to run forward, &o. " ' ' § 738. Di is short only in dirimo (disimo), to separate, and Uiisertus, eloquent. ^ r <-». *uu .JJ^^' ?? i«/l^ort only in neque, n./?^,r; neqneo, to be «w^7 f ^^""'^ Its derivatives), unlawful ;\efnndus, t^omznable; long m other words, as nemo (ne-hemo or nomo), no one. ^ to Ihltu ^ ^'''' ^^ '^ ^^"""^ '"^ ^'^**''' ^'^ ^'^ ^° ^' ^""^ ^P^^^«' § 741. Si is fhort in siqiiidem. § 742. Re is always short, except refertC = rem fert^ it concerns (but refert from refero), ^ ^' § 743. Ve is loiig, except in vehemens ( = ve-mens),/<^«5fe. § 744 Monosyllabic words ending in a vowel are loner • ^'^ SI, tu, te, me, se, ne, e, de. ^ * Exceptions. The enclitics >xe short : as, qug vfi ng rP i» rM^\ P86 (reaps?), ptg (suoptg) : qua (asu, preceded^by si' num'ete^No^ Smg. Fern, and Norn, Ace. Fl. Neut from quis. ' ^^ ^'^"*' SM. L. G. E 194 PBOSODT. §745. §7i9. 3. In (B.) KULES KESPECTING FINAL SYLLABLES. I. Final Vowels. § 745. a is long : 1. In the Ablative Sing, of the First Declension : as, mensa. 2. In the Vocative Sing, of the First Declension of Substantives in as and es (excepting tes) : as, Aenea, Anchisa. Ohs. But those in es (excepting ies) more frequently make S : see § 746, 2. 3. In the Imperative Active of the I'irst Conjugation ; as, ama. 4. In Prepositions, Adverbs, and Numerals : as, a (ab), contra, supra; antea, frustra: triginta, quinquaginta. (But see next paragraph : 4.) a is short : 1 . In the Nominative and Vocative Sing, of the First Declension : as, mensa. 2. In the Voc. of Greek nouns in tes, as Oresta. 3. In the Nom., Ace, and Voc. Plural of all Neuters : as, regna, maria, cornuS. 4. In the Adverbs ita, posteS, the Conjunction quia, and the Interjection ej&. Oba. a in Ace. Sing, from a Gk. word in eus is donbtfol : as TheseS. § 746. e is long : 1. In the Ablative Sing, of the Fifth Declension : as, die: and consequently in hodie, quare. Also in the contracted forms of the Genitive and Dative : as, fide ( = fidSi). 2. In Greek words in e of the First Declension : as, epitome, Anchisiade (Voc. of Anchisiades) ; and in Greek Neuters Plural contracted : as, Tempe, cete. i J 4. In e I 5. In e is short verb), fuer § 747. i docuisti, vi i is short 1. In: fo 2. In of i is douhtj Oba. tltK( § 748. ] But is i 1. In I as 2. Wh( 3. In n is short : tell me (both phrase nesc quidem : as, § 749. n i §7*9. QUANTITY. 195 3. In the Imperative Active 2nd Person Sing, of the becond Conjugation: as, mone. But the follow- mg are doubtful: vidi, vail, cavg; and some- times (esp. in the comic poets), habi, taci, mang, juDe« 4. In the Adverbs derived from Adjectives of the becond Declension : as, docte, aegre : with the exception of bene, male, supeme. infeme Cin Luor. and Anson.), interne. ' ^ 5. In the Adverbs fere, fermg, and the Interjection ohg. Oha. Concerning monosyllables in e, see § 744. i is short : 1 . In nisi, quasi, sicubi, necnbi, and in the very rare form cui for oui. 2. In the Dative and Vocative of Greek Substantives Ale^ Declension: as, Dat. Paridi, Voc. i is doubtful in mihT, tibt, sibT, ibT, ubl Obs. fittque always; but always ibidem, ubique. We find also ct...ae. § 748. is mostly common: as, amo, amato, leo, octg. But is long : 1. In Datives and Ablatives of the Second Declension • as, domino, deo, magno. 2. When it represents the Greek to : as, Dido, PlutS. 3. In monosyllables : as, do, pro. tell me (both used parenthetically), nesciS, Ikmm not (in the phrase nescio quis), and quando when comnoundfid with quidem : as, quandoquidem. § 749. n is always long : as, corr ;i f!.uditu. « K2 196 PROSODY. II. Final Consonants. § 750. % § 750. as is almost always hng : as, mensas, civitas, laudas. as is short only : 1. In an&s, anatis, a duck. 2. Ace. Plur. of Greek Substantives of the Third De- clension : as, ArcadSs. And some Greek Noms. as Ilias, &c. Ohs. In va8 (vJldis) the Nom. is probably doubtful. § 751. es is almost always long : as, vulpes, a/oa?, leones. es is only short : 1. In the Nom. and Voc. Sing, of some dissyllabic and polysyllabic Substantives in es, which have the penultimate short in the Genitive : as, miles, itis, interpres, etis; and adj. praepes, etis; but merces, edis ; pes, pedis ; abies, abietis. 2. In the Nom. fi) is the strik- ing-out of a vowel, or a syllable ending with m, at the end of a word, when the following word begins with a vowel or /i, and is indicated by the sign ^ : as, GontlcCiore oranes {read, contioQjer'omnjes) ^ MC mMnim oxclamat (me mls6r'|exclain|5,t). 200 PROSODY. §768. Perquo hWmos (perqu'hI6|me8). tTmbriirum haflc sSdSs (umbrar'|hfieo 8ed|es). Si ad vitulam Bpectas. Obt. 2. The TUsion of a long vowel before a short one is rare : iw, intimo &more. Ob$. 8. The Eliaion of an Iambus is avoided : as, disce m6o exemplo. ^*v'owelYthu8°"'''^^ * ^""^ ''"''*''' **** " °' ^'" *^ *"^^^' "°^ "°* *^® ^"'*' nostra cat, nostri est, nostrum est, should bo written and read nostra'st, nostri'st, nostrum'st. Ohs.5. Sometimes a final long vowel remains in Hiatus, and is not elided : us, Tor sunt | conat|l im|ponere | Polifl | Ossam Virg. Obs. 6. The Interjections d, heu, ah, proh, are not eUded : as, pater I 6 hSmKnIum di|vumqp.e aet|erna potjestas.— Virg. Ah 6g6 I non alit|er trist|e8 e|vincere | morbos.— 'lib. ^^IhL °°"f ^°"""3^ ^ I""? ^o^el or diphthong at the end of a word becomet snoit before a word beginning with a vowel : as, Te Cory|d6n, « Aljexi ; tra|hit sua | quemque vol|uptas.— Virg. Insttlae | Ioni|o in mag|no quas | dira Ce|laeno.-Virg. N.B. This is an imitation of the Greek usage. Obs. 8. Earlier writers sometimes elide s : as, Nam si de nihilo flerent, ex omnibu' rebus.— Luor. § 766. Synaergs'-s (awaipeaie) is the combination of two vowels into one, and is indicated by the sign -_, .-^. It is ^JZTn^ '""'^ "^ '^^'"'^ «f ^«^^« ^^i^^ "^^trical laws would otherwise exclude, and more especially in the case of proper names at the end of a verse : as. Si len|to fue|rint al|vgaria [ vimine | texta.-Virg. Caucaeilasque relfert volu|cres fur|tumque Pro|meth6i.-Virg. So Orphea, Typhofik. ^ Synaeresis is chiefly found in the following words : dlinde, prSinde, abidte, arfete, de^sse and its derivatives, antehac, and in the whole verb antSire. 9 7o7. DiaerSsis I o(al'/>«/r«/<^ ia tho. aoT»or'i+!^>, ^*_ -i*.i. ji • ,j.^ j„ nil ^ -r---=/ -= ""v' wvrj^drdfciun 01 u. uipatnonsc into two sjdlables : as, pictai. i^ ^^ ^ ■:pmm^'l»i' '>^ »» » » If i> (> II M .11 7J II II II II II II II If t* »» »> •> M n M f : \;r,. . 1ifti»imi.W&ti£lb^m^^iM §927. TRE CALENDAR. 207 § 924. In order to reduce an English to a Roman date, the number of the day in the English Calendar must be subtracted from that, of the nearest fixed point in advance of it in the Eoman Calendar of the same month. And as the Romans counted inclusively from one day to another, a unit must be added to the number thus obtained. Thus, the 10th of December is not the 3rd before the Ides, but the 4th, ^c. Also, as the Kalends form an extra day, beyond the month, a unit must be added to the number of days in the month, in ooimting on to them. Obs. Hence the rule,— After subtracting, add one for the Nones or Ides, and two for the Kalends. § 925. In giving the day of the month as a date, the Ablative was used (§ 322) : as, Kalendis Martiis, Idibus Martiis, die quiuto ante Kalendas Martias. Both die and ante were often omitted, as XIV. Kal. Mai., which may be either Accusative or Genitive. But another very common way was to begin with ante, when the Ablative became changed into the Accusative under its government : as, ante diem decimum quartum Kalendas Maias, usually written a. d. XIV. Kal. Mai. In this construction the Accusative Kalendas remained un- changed, as if it were still governed by ante. § 926. The expression ante diem must be considered as an inde- clinable Substantive, since we find it often preceded by prepositions which govern the Accusative or Ablative : as, In ante dies octSvum et septimum Kalendas Octobres c6mJt:is dicta dies. The time was fixed for the comitia for the eighth and seventh days hefore the Kalends of October. — Liv. 43, 16. Suppllcatio indicta est ex ante diem quintum Idus Octobres. A public thanhsgiving was appointed {to begin) from fhe fifth day before the Ides of October. — Liv. 45, 2. § 927. When a day needed to be intercalated In the Julian Ka- lendar, it was done by reckoning the 6th of the Kalends of March twice. Hence the name for Leap-year, Bissextile (bis-sextus). The two sixths (24th and 25th February) appear to have been dis- tinguished as prior and posterior. Note. — A complete Calendar for an ordinaiy year is given on the following page : — 208 THE CALENDAR. §928. 1^ D < O od cq (09 ^ »i-(S O M .2 DM M . ... . g) S 9> Oh U> 00 ^ "OS 11 §^ ^ 3 i 4> 5 . I £ ^ s B . a a I* I'? a M c< f^ ^lAsO r^oo ^O *- rJ 'A tfiAstf i^oo ^C> m ri #«i -f lA.v^ r^oo ^o ►-* 928. ( 209 ) Appendix IL — Monet. § 929. The original monetary unit of the Romans was the us (assis), or pounds viz., of copper. The fractions of the as were designated as follows : — TJncia, one ounce; A of a Sextans, ntis, two ounces ; ft. that is, h Quadrans, ntis, three » t^i. >» i Tricns, ntis, fomr »i ft. » i Quincunx, ncis, five *i ft Semis, issis, six »» ?.. »» h Septunx, ncis seven >» i^ Bes, bessis, eight » ft. >i ■i Dodrans,* ntis nine » fe. II 5 Dextans.t ntis, ten >» \^v II g Deunx, ncis, eleven » \k If ♦ = de-quadrans. t = de-sextans. Obs. The bubstantive as and its fractions are used of other units. Thus terna JQg&ra et septunces (Liv.), is three acres and seven-twelfths {a-piece) : herea ex asse, heir to the entire estate, ex dodrante, to three-fourths, etc. So fSnus ex triente factum 6rat bessKbus (Cic), interest had risen from ^ per cent, (per month) to § ; ox from 4 to 8 per cent. (Madvig.) . § 930. From being originally a full pound in weight, the as waa gradually reduced, till, in the time of Augustus, it waa a small coiUj of little more than nominal value (" vilem redigatur ad assem," Hor. Sat. 1, 1, 43). The denarius was a silver coin, first coined five years before the first Punic war, and waa originally equal to 10 aases. But in the later times of the republic the imit of business calculations was the sestertiua {sesterce), being the fourth part of a denarius, and equal to 2^ asses, or a little more than 2d. The ses- terce was also a silver coin, and both it and the denarius maintained a uniform value, notwithstanding the depreciation of the imit on which both were based. Obs. Sestertius is a contraction for semis tertius, lit. the third is minus a half, i. e. 2|. This was often written IIS, whence the common abbreviation HS or HS. § 931. Sums of 1000 and under are counted regularly : as, mille sestertii, 1000 sesterces; trecenti sestertii, 300 sesterces. But in expressing several thousand sestertii, the neuter plural seatertia was employed, with which millia must be understood, unless expressed : as duo sestertia or duo millia sestertium, 2000 sesterces. § 932. To express sums of a million of sesterces and upwards the multiplicative Numeral Adverbs, decies, &c., are used with sestei- tium or HS., the words " centena millia " being underetood. TLiua 210 ROMAN NAMES. § 9.13. dScies sestertinm (= decies cent^na millia sestertium, ten times a hundred thousand sesterces) is one million sesterces. (Sometimes we find only decies centena, "millia sestertium » being understood.) In like manner sexagies sestertium is six millions of sesterces. In such expressions sestertium must have been originally a Gen PI. ; but it came to be regarded as a Neuter Substantive in the Smgular, and was declined accordingly : as, Argenti ad summam sortertii dScies in aerarium rettttlit, he brought into the treasury wp to the sum of one million of sesterces.^ Liv. 45, 4. SyngrSpha sestertii centies, a Bill of ten millions of sesterces.-- Cio. Fhil 2, 37. Serviliae sexagies sestertio margarltam mercatus est, he bought Serviha a pearl for six millions of sesterces.— Suet. Caes. 50. Greater and smaller sums may be combined in one statement: as, acc5pi vicies diicenta triginta quinque millia quadringentos dScem et septem nummos, 2,235,417 sesterces.—Gic. Veir. 1, 14. Appendix in.~RoMAN Names. § 933. A Eoman citizen had ordinarily three names, as Marcus Tullius Cicero, Caius Julius Caesar. Of these the middle one was properly called nomen, being the name of his gens; the third, cog- nomen, being that of his family (f&mllia) ; the first, praenomen or fore-name, being that by which he was known from the other members of the same family, and answering to our "Christian name." In addition to these, some persons had what was called agnomen or an appendage to the name proper : as, Publius Cornelius Scipid Afncanus. When a person was adopted into another gens, he took the entire name of the individual adopting him, but appended to it that of his former gens as an agnomen, with the adjectival termina- tion, -anus. Thus, the son of L. Aemilius PauUus, adopted by P Cornelius Scipio, became P. Cornelius Scipio Aemilianus. Obs. 1. The same individual, might have more than one afftiomen. Thus the P. Cornehua Scipio Aemilianus mentioned above, was also called P Cor. nehus Scipio Africanus Aemilianus. Obs. 2. The name of father and grandfather were often added by way of dis- tinction. Thus C. Fannius (Cic. Am. 1, 3) is called M. F., i. e. Marci films ; and Cn. Pompeius Strabo, father of the triumvir, is called Cn. Pom- nrT'^l^"^' ^•' ^' ^- ^*''*^° ' *• ^' "^ "f^extus, grandson of Cnaern. Obs. 3. Women are designated by the gentile name of their family, as Julia. Obs. 4. lu some cases an individual had only two names : as, C. Marius. §937. ABBREVIATIONS. 211 § 934. Tlie whole of a man's name was of course rarely, if ever, used in speaking to him, though it was employed in the headings of letters, and in documents generally. The family name (cognomen) was mostly used in addressing those not of the same family ; the use of the gentile name (cognomen) had something formal and respectful aho at it ; that of the fore-name (praenomen) was confined to members of the same family or intimate friends. Even an honourable agnomen, like Magnus, Africanus, was transmitted to his family by the person who bore it. § 935. When a slave was manumitted by a citizen, he took the praenomen and gentile name of his manumitter, and added to it •ome other appropriate name (often that by which he was before called), as cognomen. Thus Cicero's freedman, Tiro, is called M. TuUius Tiro. As additional names of freedmen, may be mentioned, Q. Horatius Flaccus (the father), P. Terentius Afer; L. Corneliua Ohrysogonus, etc. i Appendix IV. — Abbreviahons. § 936. A. Pkaenomina. A. Aulua. Mam. MamercQg. App. Appius. N. or Num L. Numerius. C. Caiu8. P. Publius. D. Decimus. Q. Quintus. Cn. (Gn.) Cnaeus. S. or Sex. Sextus. K, Eaeso. Ser. Servlus. L« Lucius. Sp. Spurius. M. Marcus. T. Titus. M'* Manius. Ti. Tiberius. § 937. B. Titles, &c. (Anoient). Aed. Aedilis. 0. M. Optimus Maximus Cos. Consul. (surnames of Jupiter). Coss. Consules. Pont Max. Pontifex Maximus. Des. Designatus. Quir. Qiiirltes. D. Divus (applied to de- S.P.Q.R. Senatus Populusque ceased emperors). Romynus. Imp. Imperator,* Tr. PI. Tribunus Plebis. P. C. Patres Conscripti, * In republican times tbis was an honorary title, bestowed by the Senate upon victorious generals. By the emperors it was used to signify their possession of supreme power. In the former case it was used after the name : as, M. TuUiua Cicero Imperator ; in the latter it was prefixed, as Imperator C. Julius Caesar. 212 A. C. N. L. U. R. A. U. C. D. D. D. D. D. D. M. D. O. M. P. S. D. or 8. only. S. P. D. P. C. * Judicial ABBREVIATIONS. §938. § 938. C. Miscellaneous (Ancient). Absolve,! Antiquo.2 Condemno.' Non liquet.! Uti Hopras.a Anno urbis conditae. Dono dedit. Dat, dicat, dedicat. Dis Manibus.3 Deo Optimo, maximo. Filius. y Salutem dicit. Salutem plurimam dicit.* Faciendum ouravit.^ P. F. F. F. Felix, faustum, for- tunatam. H. C. S. E, Hie conditus situs est.' H. M. H. N. S. Hoc monumentum he- redes non sequitur.* Libertas. Millo Passu um. Nepos. Obiit. Respublica. Senatus consultiiia, E. E. V. Si vales bene est, ego valeo.* Potestas. Vixit.8 L. M. N. Ob. Resp. 8. C. S. V. B. Pot. V. formula. ' Sepulchral. * Used in voting (with respect to laws). * Epistolary. 10 § 939. D. Modern. A.B. or B.A. Artium Baccalau- leg. reus. LL.B. A.M. or M.A. Artium Magister. LL.D, A.C. Ante Christum. M.B. cet. cetera. cf. confer, conferatur. M.D. cod. codd. codex, codices MS., MSS. D. Doctor. del. dele, deleatur. Mus. D. ed., edd. editio, editiones. N.B. e.g. exempli gratia. N.T. etc. et cetera. h.e. hoc est. Obs. I.H.S. Jesus Hominum P.S. Salvator. q.v. I.N.R.I. Jesus Nazaraeus sc. Rex Judaeorum. sq., sqq. J.C. Jesus Christus. I. ctus (Ictus). Juris oonsultus. S.T.B. ; S.T.D. ; ibid., ib. ibidem. 8.T.P. id. idem. V. eel., V. cl. J.U.D. Juris Utriusque Doctor. V.D.M. U., 11. CO. locus citatus, loci citati. V.T. lege, legendum, Legum Baccalau)reuB. Legum Doctor. Medicinae Bacca- laureus. Medicinae Doctor. Manusoriptus (li- ber), or pi. Musicae Doctor. Nota bene. Novum Testa- mentum. Observa. Post scriptum. quod vide. scilicet. quod sequitur, or pi. JSanctae Theologiae j Baccalaureus, Doc. ( tor. Professor. Vir celeberrimus, clarissimus. Verbi divini Mi- nister. Vetus Testamcnturo,, 15 36 40 .vaj, -wiiAME,*' • •■axm VERSUS MEMORIALES. 213 5 10 15 20 25 80 36 40 Appendix V. — Versus Memoriales. 1. Difference of Quantity in certain Words, Est Seer in silvis, equus aeer Olympia vincit. Non appQret iners, faciendas app&ret ut res. Caligas, manicas caZJ/zasque ub' jernere non est. Voce trcmente eanet^ qui toto vertice cotnet. Deficit ille cdnis, cui candent tergora canis. In magno et cdro prostat caro rara macello. Cedo facit cessi, cecXdi cado, caedo ce(Mi. Fert ancilla colum, penetrat res humida odium. Vin' bonus esse cSmes ? Sermones occipe comes, Compte cSmas puer ; heus ! comis c5mes esto magistnx Quod mihi consuSram, consuSram tendere rete. Bellandi cupido damno est sua saepe cupHdo. Non violant decSris memores praecepta decoris. DedSre dis animum par est, qui tanta dedSre. Vin' tibi dlcamus, cui carmina nostra dkemua f Difftdit is foedus, male qui diffldit amico. Per reges, deus, atque dUces cZficesque r^esque. Camem sanus edit, carmen doctissimus edit. Ed&cat hie catulos, quos mox educat in apros. Si sapis, es, ut sis : nimirum non Ss edendo. Qni fdbida ludimt, pueris etfabula grata est. Hi sit Ma. fides, non fides: quaere fideles. Decepit me saepe /reifwrn nimis abiete /re^wm. Per quod quis peccat, per idem punitur et idem. Indlcat bellum rex huic, qui se indtcat hostem. Non talos iacerew^, si ludicra pra va yacerew^. Si potans sermone lobes, fuge : nam prope lobes. Est gravis ille labor, cujus sub pondere labor. Cum ratione leges, quern magna ad munera leges. Tu, quaecunque legis, non instar legis habebis. In silvis lepores, in verbis quaere lepores. Imberbis levis ; levis est, qui pondere parvo est. Non Itber, ut sis liber, aget, sed recta voluntas. Deceptura viros pingit mala femina mcUas. In rate triste malum, quum fracta est turbine mtius^ Mdlo mihi pulchrum malo decerpere malum. Nobilis est mulier matrona, at Matroiia flumen. OfFicium mtseris offers, Si mlseris aera. Fnimentum moMur, sed homo molltur agenda. Sunt bene tnOrati multi nee in urbe mOrati. Non sunt se fisi, nisi qui sunt numine nia. 214 VERSUS MEMORIALES. 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 Nitgre cum studio, si vis aliquando nm>y.. Sit n^Tto nota : ndtns ventus, sed nStus amicus. Oblitus decoris ne dedecore oblUus adsit. Obsidet oisidena, possidetis possXdet exin. Occldet latro, misere quoad occtdet ipse.' ^nia i&mflunt^fiSri quae posse negabam. Os ona produc, sed Ss ossis corripe, quaeso. Staguat sicca palus, fixus stat joaZws acutus. Saei^ puer ^are^, p^ret ut sibi dona parentis, tadet ntevcine parens, quum filius est bene parms. tmd^re vult Justus, sed im pendere recusat. Est color mpicajjicoque nivisque prcisywe. Ludo yXla, pUum contorqueo, pUa columna est. Pro reti aut regionei)%a est, pro yerhere plaga. bunt cives urbis ^(T^jm^ms, sedpdpulus arbor. Si vitare potes, no plurima pocula ^jo^es. Pro/ectus ostende, schola non mt^ prS/ectus. Non quae quisque rg/erf, sapientis discere rBferi. i>at repew^e gradu serpens, fuge, damna r^pente. bi qua se(^e sSdes, atque est tibi commoda sSdeSy Ilia sec?e s&fe, si nova tuta minus. Lacte sSrum, semmqne die secemitur ipso. Num natale sSlum placet omni tempore s5lumf Hos non susptcio, quibus est suspicio prompta. Integer est totus, tStus est, quotus ordine, quivis. Tnlula grana terit, ^rTi^Zi nascuntur in agris. Gressum fige vadis, quando per flumina vSdis, Spondet vas vSdis, at vas vasis continet escam. Si transire vSlis maris undas, utere v&is. Veneris ad Veneris, mecum vgnens ut inde Merx v^nit numis, v^/i?« hue aliunde profectus Vtncltur victus, vinctus non vinatur ultro. Ni probitate vXres, male jactas, inscie, vires. Ut rem quamque v5'ces, debes cognoscere vdces. VGmere quam tollis, vSmere agrum terra videtur. 80 2. DiPPiSRENCE OF MeANINO IN CERTAIN WORDS. Cantat acant/m avis, sed crescit acanthus in agris. Plus aeto^e graves hieme atque aestate premuntur Qui confirmat, ait, sed qui responsa dat, inquit. Alga venit nelago, sed nascitur viva palude. Sancta voces arcana, putes secreta profana. ^ma tegunt corpus, quod figere tela minantur. Armm brutorum est, humerus ratione fruentum. 85 90 9 VERSUS MEMOHIALES. 215 Turbat asilus cquoa, miseroe susccpit astjhm- F&c/elix aliis videare tibique beutua. Bills inest felli, si/el vesica putatur. Qui sculpit, caelat, servans abscondita celat. Splendent ca7ididH8 atque niger, non albua et ater. Haec cassis galea est, hi casses retia signant : Cusaide conde caput, capiantur cassibus apri. Clava ferit, cZavws firmat, davisque recludit. Cominus ense ferit, jaculo cadit eminus ipse. Comoedi scenam, comedones quaerite coenam. Conamur magnam, moUmur difficilem rem. Consortes fortuna eadera, socios labor idem, Unum collegas efficit officium ; Sed caios iiiciunt schola, ludus, mensa sodales. Gorrigit invitos, emendat cura sequaces. Sanguis inest venis, cruor est de corpora fusus. 100 Immotus yace^, at motus sunt signa cuhantis. Est cutis in came, at detracta a covpovQ pell is. Delige cum cura, turn dilige semper amicum. Delto quod scriptum est, sed flammam exstinguo lucernae. Longius ire nequit, quicunque diutius ivit. Uxorem vir ducit, at illi femina nubit. Edicunt reges, indicit festa sacerdos ; Indicat auctorem facti, qui novit eundem. Expetit hoc nemO; quod non satis expedit ipsi. Expugnat capiens, oppugnans obsidet urbem. Fa-', res divinas, at/ws humana tuetur. Forfice sartores, tonsores /o?;p*ce gaudent, At faber ignitum /orcipe prensat opus. "■■ - est arcus, i-idfornax saxa perurit. •.bet/wrnwrn, /omace hypocausta calescunt. 1; "nusfrenos, vector quern flectit habenis. Fi. ' aic capitis, /rondlem die arboris esse. Gignit ager fruges, nascuntur in arbore/rwc^MS. Vincentes /wgrjes, sed victos ipse fugabis. Quis duxit bellum, Poenus quod gessii et egit » 120 G^'66a premit tergum, sed collo struma molesta est. Bruto gurgulio est, homini gula^ guttur utrique. Esca sapit pulchre, quam gustat lingua libenter. Mobile dependet, sed res immobilis haeret. Ales hirundo canit, nat hirudo, movetur arundo. 125 Arma movent hostes, inimici jurgia nectimt. Jnvidus. invidiae reus ipse invitus agetur. Castra sacramentum, Jusjurandum fora poscunt. Lacteo lac sugo ; lacto lac praebeo nato : 105 110 115 216 VERSUS MEMORIALES. / Infens diim lactet, nutrlx hunc sedula lactat. 130 LaetUiam vultu prao te fers, ;/audia mente, Ne fer laternam, quum prod is, absque liiwrmu Noil licet asse mihi, qui me non asse licetiir. 'J'ango lyram digitia, sed Uram vomere findo. Ad mare litna habcs, ambas ad flumina rijjoa. 136 Scripta loom praebent, praebent loca terra polusquo. Humidm est intra madidm({we est uvidus extra. Articulm membri, sed membrum corporis est para. Mente pia i.zmsa fruere, omni mense parata. Venduntur merces, operantibus est data merces. 140 Spemo minaa auri, vulgi contemns minas, rex. Confundit teraere miserum cum paupere tiro. Muros cum vallis ac fossis moenia dicas. Dat mortem natura, necem vis, fa.aque ?ei; I'UI.NXEU BJT W. C1»WK8 AND SONS. 8TA3I10KD 8TKBl?j, AND OUARINO CROSS. Ki 1 LATIN DICTIONARIES, BY WM. SMITH, LL.D., CLAMICAL EXAMlNBIl IN TUB UNIVKB8.Tr Or U)NDOM. AND KU.TOU OF THK t.ICTrONARIE8 OK •OUEKK AND UOMAN ANXtQUITIES. BIOQUAJ'HV, MVTIIOLOOY. AND 0EO •'■ './.-l I.J 't'L- «^,t/ J .1 . i I / '■ -^ ■ fhi^^L (^^ ^Ct^t^Q /■' '-/- 'xJU^ V v f/tr f t; / t u- S^ /L^^' c4-e'k^^ ^ ^^' NC^„ x.^ Z" S^3a««|*Wf